JP6524615B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to the winning state when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are some gaming machines that can store lottery numbers for a predetermined number of times based on the winning on the starting winning opening until the respective lottery conditions are satisfied.

Patent No. 2005-118072

However, further improvement in interest has been sought.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem or the like, and aims to provide a game machine which can improve the interest in the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a first ball entering means provided at a position where it is possible to enter a game ball fired in a first direction, and the first ball entering means And the second ball entering means provided at a position where the game ball fired in the second direction where the game ball is difficult to enter can enter the ball, and the game ball fired in the first direction is the first Set the first state where it is difficult to enter the ball, and the second state where game balls fired in the first direction are more likely to enter the first ball than the first state. Acquisition means for acquiring predetermined discrimination information based on the game ball having entered at least one of the first entering means and the second entering means; Discrimination means for performing predetermined discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means, and discrimination result of the discrimination means Based on the fact that the game has become a specific determination result, the above-mentioned acquisition based on the bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player and the game ball entering at least the first ball entering means. Storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the means until the discrimination using the discrimination information is performed, with the predetermined number as the upper limit being a predetermined number, and the bonus game is performed in the first direction The specific setting period is set so as to be advantageous to the player by firing the game ball at least, and the state setting unit is configured to at least perform the second operation while the bonus game is being performed. in the case where the state is set, based on the establishment of at least different specific conditions and end of the benefits game, which is configured to set the first state, the specific If the game ball continues to be fired in the first direction, the number of game balls more than the specific number can easily enter the first ball entry means during execution of the bonus game der which is configured to is, in the state after the award game is finished, which can suggest the same game as the game suggested by representation embodiment to be executed during at least the benefits game specific that has been configured to be able to execute production.

A gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising: a launcher capable of launching a game ball.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the first ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter the ball, and the game ball enters the first ball entry means The second ball entering means provided at a position where it is possible to enter the game ball fired in the second direction, which becomes difficult, and the game ball fired in the first direction enter the first ball entering means A state setting capable of setting a first state that is difficult and a second state in which gaming balls launched in the first direction are easier to enter the first ball entry means than the first state Acquiring means for acquiring predetermined discrimination information based on the game ball entering at least one of the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means, and the means acquired by the acquiring means Discrimination means for performing predetermined discrimination using the discrimination information and the discrimination result of the discrimination means become specific discrimination results A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player on the basis of the identification information obtained by the acquiring means based on the game ball entering at least the first ball entering means; A storage means which can be stored until the determination using the determination information is performed, with the upper limit of the predetermined number as a specific number, and the bonus game includes firing the game ball in the first direction And the state setting unit is configured to set the second state at least while the bonus game is being executed. based on the establishment of at least different specific conditions and end of the benefits game, which is configured to set the first state, the first direction in the particular time period And the game ball is configured to be more likely to enter the specified number or more of the first ball entry means during execution of the bonus game when the game ball continues to be fired. Ah it is, in the state after the award game is finished, is configured to be able perform the suggested specific effect which can be a game same game as suggested by representation embodiment to be executed during at least the benefits game Tei Ru.

Thereby, there is an effect that the interest to the game can be improved .

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in a main control unit. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol FIG. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the win in the normal symbol, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table And (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special variation pattern selection table. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special selection table for out-of-time, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special selection table for on-time. (A) is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of ROM in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus, (b) is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the pseudo | simulation interval production performed after the end of a big hit and a big hit. (A)-(c) are the schematic diagrams which showed the flow of pseudo | simulation interval production typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the model which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the model which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the presentation performed at the time of the start of pseudo | simulation interval presentation, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the pseudo interval presentation at the time of big hit. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect performed in the special variation end display period of the pseudo interval effect, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed at the end of the pseudo interval effect is there. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect performed in the special variation extension display period of the pseudo interval effect, and (b) is executed when the big hit occurs in the special variation extension display period of the pseudo interval effect It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect performed. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control. It is a flowchart which shows the normal fluctuation | variation selection process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special fluctuation selection process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special fluctuation control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command setting processing for a display performed by MPU in voice lamp control treatment. It is the flowchart which showed the special fluctuation end command setting processing for a display performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) shows inter-round effect start command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device It is a flowchart. (A) is a flowchart showing special game effect end command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) shows special variation end command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device It is a flowchart. (A) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning picture setting processing which is run by MPU inside the display control. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol variation processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the period shortening process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special change control processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the third embodiment, (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the third embodiment FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st contact classification counter C2 in 3rd Embodiment, and the jackpot classification in a special symbol. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the state setting table defined in the ROM in the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. FIG. 18 is a schematic view schematically showing transition of the gaming state of the game. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol variation processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st contact classification counter C2 and the big hit classification in a special symbol in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of the special selection change pattern selection table in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of pseudo | simulation interval presentation in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the fifth embodiment FIG. It is the model which showed typically the content of the delivery speed selection table in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the payment command setting processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the payout control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the payment control processing performed by MPU in the payment control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball control processing performed by MPU in the payout control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the rental ball control processing performed by MPU in the delivery control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the modification of 5th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the modification of the fifth embodiment, (b) is a block diagram of the RAM in the main control device in the modification of the fifth embodiment It is a block diagram which shows an electrical configuration. It is the model which showed typically the content of the ball | bowl supply setting table in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows ball supply stop processing performed by MPU in the main control device in the modification of a 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch time setting process performed by MPU of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 1st Embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The player can change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or change the content of the effect of super reach, for example, by the player. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, 3 of “town stage,” “empty stage,” and “island stage”. There are two stages. Then, various effects such as fluctuation effects and reach effects that are performed along with entering the first ball entry port 64 described later (start winning) are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage It is done. The stage change is performed when the player operates the frame button 22 during a period in which the variable effects are not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and whenever the frame button 22 is operated, for example, It is repeatedly changed in the order of sky stage "→" island stage "→" town stage "→ .... Further, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, a "town stage" is set as an initial stage.

  On the other hand, when the normal reach effect is started, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach during the normal reach when developing from the normal reach to the super reach. If the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor 51a, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance (Not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is then driven to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is generally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "two-and-a-box" or "dollar box") placed under the lower plate 50 to receive the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. It will be. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a wood screw from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed when the ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (second) when the ball passes the normal entrance 67. Symbol) is drawn. In the drawing of the special symbol performed for entering the first ball entrance 64, the determination of whether or not it is a big hit of the special symbol is performed, and when it is determined that the big symbol is a special symbol, the big hit type The determination of is also made. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is closed until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses) or 10 balls are won And the opening is repeated a predetermined number of times. As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, and therefore, a large number of prize balls are paid out from the normal time. As big hit classification of special design, 4 kinds of “big hit A”, “big hit B”, “big hit C”, “big hit D” are provided, and the specified winning opening 65a is opened the number of times according to the big hit type Ru. In addition, after the end of the special game state, the game value (game value) according to the jackpot type is given to the player as an added value after the jackpot end.

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the ordinary ball entry port 67, it is determined whether the regular symbol is hit or not. When the symbol is hit normally, the motorized accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It will be in the state. That is, when it comes to the hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, and as a result, the drawing of the special symbol becomes easy to be performed.

  In addition, when the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83 and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is performed in the second symbol display device 83, the number of times of passage is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37 While being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variation display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of holding balls for the normal ball entry port 67 remains, the lottery of the next normal symbol is performed, and the variation display according to the lottery is It is started.

  As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, four kinds of "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot C", and "jackpot D" are provided.

  When it becomes "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit C", and "big hit D", it becomes a special gaming state of the number of rounds according to each jackpot type. Specifically, "big hit A" is a big hit (3R big hit) where the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened three times, and "big winning B" is a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. It is a jackpot (4R jackpot) opened four times. Also, "big hit C" is a big hit (6R big hit) where the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened six times, and "big winning D" is open 15 times for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. It is a big hit (15R big hit). In each jackpot, the length of the interval (interval period) from the closing of the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a to the next opening of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is constant (10 Is configured to be seconds). In addition, after the end of each jackpot, as the added value after the end of the jackpot, the probability of hitting the symbol usually increases from the end of the jackpot until the lottery of the special symbol is ended eight times. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol (during the special symbol oddity) until the lottery of the special symbol is finished 12 times after the big hit end.

  Here, the "special symbol high probability state" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, a probability state of the so-called special symbol (during the special symbol oddity), in other words, transition to the special gaming state It is an easy game state. On the other hand, when it is not "high probability state of special symbol" is called "low probability state of special symbol", it is a state where jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of special symbol, that is, jackpot probability of special symbol is normal Indicates the condition (normal condition of special symbol). In addition, "time symbol of the ordinary symbol" (during the short period of the ordinary symbol) means that the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol is increased, and the gaming state in which the ball is easy to enter the first ball entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not "normal symbol time reduction state" is called "ordinary symbol normal state", which indicates that the probability of hitting the symbol is normal, that is, the probability of hitting is lower than during time saving. .

  Thereafter, after the jackpot of the special symbol is over, the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol, that is, until the lottery of the special symbol is finished 12 times after the jackpot is over, of the special symbol It is called a definite change period. In addition, in order to make an explanation intelligible, the definite variation period of a special symbol is shown using the lottery number of a special symbol. For example, when it becomes the definite variation period of the special symbol until the lottery of the special symbol is finished 12 times, the definite variation period of the special symbol is described as 12 times. In addition, the period when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol after the big hit end of the special symbol, that is, the time from the end of the big hit until the lottery of the special symbol is finished 8 times It is called a period. In addition, in order to make an explanation intelligible, it shows a short term of the time of a normal symbol using the number of lottery of a special symbol. For example, if it is a short period of time of the normal symbol until the lottery of the special symbol is completed eight times, it is described that the short period of the normal symbol is eight times.

  As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot, the short term of the regular symbol and the definite variation period of the special symbol are common, and the number of rounds at the jackpot according to the jackpot type Is changing. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be fixed regardless of the type of jackpot. Further, for example, the period in which the "time saving state of the normal symbol" is changed may be changed according to the type of the jackpot. For example, when the jackpot type is "big hit A", the time saving state of the normal symbol is continued from the end of the "big hit A" until the drawing of the special symbol is finished three times, and when "big hit B", the "big hit B" "After the end of the special symbol until the end of the lottery of the special symbol is a time reduction state of the normal symbol is continued, and when it becomes" big hit C ", the symbol of the special symbol from the end of the" big hit C "end 8 times When the "short hit D" is reached, the time symbol of the normal symbol may be continued from the end of the "big hit D" until the drawing of the special symbol is completed 15 times.

  Furthermore, instead of increasing the probability of hitting the symbol normally, open the symbol after the time of opening the motorized symbol (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 or hitting the symbol once The number of times may be changed. Moreover, in this embodiment, after the big hit end, it becomes "high probability state of special symbol" and "time saving state of normal symbol", but after "high probability state of special symbol" is finished, "time symbol of normal symbol" "" May be configured. Instead of the number of times of drawing the special symbol, the time saving state of the normal symbol may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 minutes to 5 minutes etc.) has elapsed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, it is always set to the "special symbol low probability state". After that, when it becomes the jackpot of the special symbol, it shifts to "the high probability state of the special symbol", and shifts to "the time saving state of the normal symbol". When transitioning to the "special symbol high probability state", the state is continued until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 12 times after the jackpot of the special symbol, regardless of the type of the jackpot. Then, when the jackpot of the special symbol is newly made to be a jackpot of the special symbol by the time the lottery of the special symbol is finished 12 times after the jackpot is finished, the state returns to the “special symbol low probability state”.

  It should be noted that while the "special symbol high probability state" is continued, if a special symbol big hit is newly made, the "special symbol high probability state" is further special symbol after the big hit of the new special symbol The lottery will continue until the 12 rounds are completed. For example, after changing to "special symbol high probability state" after becoming a big hit of the special symbol, and when it becomes a new jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, "special symbol high probability state" is further the new After the end of the jackpot, it will be continued until 12 lotterys of special symbols are made. Therefore, in this case, until at least 14 lots of drawing of 2 special symbol lottery performed before new jackpot and 12 drawing of special symbol lottery performed after new jackpot end, The "special symbol high probability state" will be continued.

  In addition, when it becomes the big hit of the special symbol, when it moves from “the normal condition of the normal symbol” to “the short condition of the normal symbol”, the condition is that the drawing of the special symbol ends 8 times after the big hit of the special symbol Continue until On the other hand, after becoming a jackpot of a special symbol, it returns to "the normal state of a normal symbol" unless it becomes a jackpot of a new special symbol by the time the lottery of the special symbol for a predetermined number of times is finished.

  And, while "time saving state of the normal symbol" is continued, if it becomes a big hit of the special symbol anew, "time saving state of the normal symbol" is further of the special symbol after the big hit end of the new special symbol Continues until the draw is over 8 times. For example, after becoming a jackpot of a special symbol and shifting to "time symbol status of a normal symbol", if it becomes a new jackpot in the fifth drawing of a special symbol, "time symbol status of a normal symbol" is further the new jackpot of It is continued until the drawing of the special symbol is performed 8 times after the end. That is, in the present embodiment, while the "time saving state of the normal symbol" is continued, when the jackpot of the special symbol is newly added, the time and short time according to the jackpot type of the new special symbol (" The duration of the time saving state of the normal symbol is updated.

  A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, at the upper right side upper part (right upper part of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform fluctuation display by indicating whether or not the drawing of the special symbol performed in conjunction with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is being executed, or performing fluctuation display or fluctuation As a stop symbol after the end, the special symbol (the first symbol) according to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown in the lighted state or the variation of the ball entering the first entrance 64 has not been executed. The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display of the special symbol (the first symbol) is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of ball entry is held up to four times at maximum The holding ball number is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of times of suspension is not limited to four times, and is three times or less (For example, 2 times) or 5 or more times (for example, 8 times) may be set.

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the luminescent color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states (high probability state of special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 with few LED by the combination of the luminescent color Or, it can display the time of the normal pattern, etc.). In addition, LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a big hit, its big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, A special symbol (first symbol) according to the jackpot D) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is disposed on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (start winning combination), the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed in the first symbol display device 37 using it as a trigger. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inches in size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is used to display the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is performed according to the request. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten main symbols attached with the numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, and the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is The front of the wooden box is almost fully filled with large numbers. On the other hand, the main symbol with an even number (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached symbol imitating a character such as a furoshiki or helmet, which is almost full on the front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery of a special symbol is a big hit, all the numbers from "0" to "9" may gather, regardless of a big hit type. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to execute the same effect (the pseudo interval effect) as the interval effect performed between the rounds of the big hit in a predetermined period (special variation period) after the big hit end There is. In order to effectively perform this pseudo-interval effect, it is configured such that it is difficult to predict the jackpot type according to the type of the main symbol displayed in the case of a jackpot.

  More specifically, a period from the end of the jackpot to the end of at least eight drawing of the special symbol is a special fluctuation period, and in this special fluctuation period, the jackpot is displayed as a display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 The same display image as the interval effect of is displayed. Further, the control of the sound output from the sound output device 226 and the control of lighting and extinguishing by the lamp display device 227 are performed in the same manner as the interval effect during the big hit. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the jackpot has ended once when the jackpot of the special symbol is newly made during a certain variation of the special symbol, making it difficult to understand how long the jackpot will last. Therefore, since it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting the jackpot to continue longer during the jackpot and during the pseudo interval, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, the display image similar to the interval production in a big hit is a mode which performs the fluctuation display of the main symbol in a part of the image displayed in the interval production in a big hit, for example. The variable display is configured such that it is difficult for the player to distinguish the interval effect during the jackpot, for example, by reducing the display to such a degree that the player is difficult to visually recognize.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the above configuration, the jackpot type of the jackpot winning in the low probability state of the special symbol (that is, the jackpot in which the player can easily recognize the main symbol aligned by the variable display in the third symbol display device 81) If the configuration is such that discrimination can be made based on the type of the main symbol that has been prepared, it is possible for the player to grasp how many rounds the jackpot will continue. That is, for example, if it is understood that the jackpot of this time is "jackpot D (15R jackpot)", the player can recognize that the jackpot will continue until at least the 15th round, so the jackpot of the 15th round simply receives the prize ball There is a risk of becoming a task for On the other hand, if it is difficult to predict the jackpot type from the arranged main symbols as in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, every time the jackpot round for the player is completed, the following occurs. The game can be played while having a sense of anticipation that the round of will start (i.e. that the jackpot will continue). Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, when it reports that it becomes a big hit by fluctuation display (fluctuation pattern production), regardless of the big hit type, it is constituted so that all the main design is selected, but with specific big hit type It is good also as composition provided with the main design which is easy to be chosen, and the main design which is hard to be selected by specific jackpot classification. For example, in "big hit D (15R big hit)", the main symbol with the number "7" is easily aligned, and "big hit A (3R big hit)" or "7 big hit B (4R big hit)" The main symbols with numbers may be difficult to align. By this, when an effect is produced in which the main symbols with the number "7" are aligned in the variable display, the player is expected to expect "big hit D (15R big hit)" having the largest number of rounds. Can. Therefore, in the variable display, it is possible to request the player to have the main symbol attached with the number "7" aligned, so that it is possible to improve the player's interest in the variable display (variation pattern effect). it can.

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and others The upper 1/3 of the sub-display area Ds is used to display the notice effect, the character, the number of holding balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed on the upper, middle, and lower three stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 at each game. Is displayed. A large hit moving image is displayed as a big hit if it is aligned with a combination of big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of holding balls which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which the change has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 is an area | region which displays an advance presentation effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the state is more likely to shift to a jackpot than usual. In the central small area Ds2, usually, a predetermined character (a boy with a hachimaki in this embodiment) performs a predetermined movement, sometimes performs a special movement other than the predetermined movement, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by taking out, etc.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to 4 times The reserved ball number is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one holding ball number symbol is displayed per one holding ball number ball, and the number of holding balls is displayed according to the display number of the holding ball number symbol. That is, when one holding ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the holding ball number is one ball, and when four holding ball number symbols are displayed, the holding ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number-of-parked-balls design is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of balls-held is 0, that is, there is no ball-held.

  In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of balls reserved is not limited to four times, and is three times You may set to the following (for example, 2 times), or 5 times or more times (for example, 8 times). In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-hold ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of number-of-hold balls is divided by a number into a part of the third symbol display device 81 or (For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  First, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. In main controller 110, lottery of special symbols, lottery of ordinary symbols, setting of display in first symbol display device 37, setting of display in second symbol display device 83, and setting of display in third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. Used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to

  In order to select the jackpot type of the special symbol and the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbol, in the drawing of the special symbol and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first contact type counter C2 used for the first, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the out of special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first contact random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 31) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas is a first ball entrance The values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored according to the timing of entering the ball 64, respectively. The RAM 203 is also provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas), and in each of these areas, a ball is on the left and right The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored according to the timing of passing through any one of the ordinary ball entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 299) It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) is executed, and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 31).

  The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the storage area 203a. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table When it matches with the value of the jackpot random number set by 202a, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this first per random number table 202a is for high probability (special symbol low probability state period) of special symbol and high probability when special symbol is more likely to be a big hit than low probability (special symbol special It can be divided into two types, one for the high probability state of the symbol). That is, the first hit random number table 202a is configured by the first hit random number table 202a1 (not shown) for the low probability time and the first hit random number table 202a2 (not shown) for the high probability time, and The number of jackpot random numbers included in the table is different. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot. In addition, the first hit random number table 202a1 (not shown) for low probability of special symbol and the first hit random number table 202a2 (not shown) for high probability of special symbol are of main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) And return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol hold of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number to be a big hit of a special symbol, that is, if it is a random number to be a special symbol out of order, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is at the time of removal of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that will be the big win of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 The display mode is for the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first random number counter C1, when there is a low probability of the special symbol, there are three random number values that become the big wins of the special symbol, and the random number "7, 107, 282" is the first for low probability It is stored in the per-random number table 202a1. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 300, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 3, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1/100".

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 30 random number values that become the jackpot of the special symbol, and the value is "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 "is a first random number table for high probability time It is stored in 202a2. As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 300, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 30, so the probability of being a big symbol of a special symbol is "1/10".

  In the present embodiment, the random number value for the big hit stored in the first random number table 202a1 for the low probability time, and the random noise for the big hit stored in the first random number table 202a2 for the high probability time In order to avoid duplicate values with numerical values, random numbers that will be the jackpots of each are set. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 as a random number value that will be a jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside, and it may be easy to illegally attract a jackpot. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state of special symbol or low probability state of special symbol), change the random number value to be a big hit Since it can be made difficult to predict the random number value which becomes the jackpot of a special symbol by this, suppression against fraud can be aimed at.

  Further, the value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first collision type counter C2 is provided in the ROM 202. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 8B). As shown in FIG. 8B, the jackpot type in the case where the random number value is “0 to 16” in the first hit type counter C2 is “jackpot A”. Also, the jackpot type when the value is “17 to 31” is “big hit B”, and the jackpot type when the value is “32 to 94” is “big hit C”, and the value is “95 The jackpot type in the case of “99” is “jackpot D”. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, four types of hit types (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, and big hit D) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. It is configured.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reach is generated, the final stop design shifts by only one before and after the reach design. "Launch front and back out of reach" (for example, 98, 99) and "Leach other than front and back out of reach" (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop design stops at other than front and back Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected with "complete out" (e.g., a range of 0 to 89) in which a reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol holding ball storage of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the area 203a.

  In addition, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Moreover, in this embodiment, this table is divided into those for high probability of special symbol and low probability for special symbol, and the range of the random number value set for each stop type of out according to the table Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in the high probability state, a table for high probability when the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is wide 0 to 89 so that reach effect is not selected more than necessary since jackpots are easily generated Is selected, and "complete removal" is likely to be selected. In this table, "longitudinal outreach" narrows to 98, 99 and "non back and forth out of reach" also narrows to 90 to 97, making "front and back out of reach" and "reach other than back and forth out of reach" difficult to select. In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79. Table is selected and it becomes difficult to select "completely out". Further, in the low probability state, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than back and forth deviation” is wide as 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach display with a long rendering time, so it is possible to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 and the fluctuation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear outreach” is set to 98, 99.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Here, the fluctuation time refers to the time from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol to the stop display of the symbol and the finalization of the symbol. For example, after a symbol variation of 9.6 seconds is executed, if the symbol is stopped and displayed for only 0.4 seconds and the symbol is determined, the variation time is 10 seconds (9.6 seconds + 0.4 seconds) It is written that Based on this fluctuation time, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol fluctuation mode are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 31) to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that a fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 9B) storing a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and a special fluctuation pattern selection table 202e (See FIG. 9C) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 8A).

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 9B), for example, as a fluctuation pattern for deviation, various types of "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disappearance normal reach", " There are various types of Outlying Super Reach, various types of Outlier Special Reach, and as a variation pattern for jackpot, various types of Per Hit Normal Reach, Per Hit Super Reach, and Per Special Reach are specified. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type). As the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern effect of 5 seconds to 30 seconds defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, the fluctuation time of 5 seconds to 30 seconds is specified.

  In the special variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 9C), a special variation period for executing the above-described pseudo interval effect (that is, a period from the end of the jackpot to the time the lottery of special symbols is performed eight times, Alternatively, a variation pattern to be selected in the next jackpot within eight times and the period until the first round of the jackpot starts is defined. Although the details will be described later, since the special fluctuation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 9C) is configured to select a fluctuation pattern of a fluctuation period determined for each drawing number of the special symbol, The special variation period can be made the same length period (8 seconds) each time. Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a period (opening period) from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round is configured to be 2 seconds. Therefore, when it becomes the next big hit by the time when the drawing of the special symbol is performed 8 times after the big hit is finished, the period from the end of the big hit to the start of the first round of the next big hit is 10 each time It can be seconds. That is, the period until one round of the next jackpot is started after the pseudo interval presentation can be made to coincide with the execution period (10 seconds) of the interval presentation performed during the jackpot. Therefore, it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect to be executed during the jackpot and the pseudo interval effect, so it is difficult for the player to understand that the jackpot has ended, and it is also difficult to know how long the jackpot will last. be able to. Therefore, since it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting the jackpot to continue longer during the jackpot and during the pseudo-interval effect, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d and the special variation pattern selection table 202e, it is not necessary to necessarily define a period from the start of the variation to the determination of the symbol. For example, the period in which the symbol is stopped and displayed may be a fixed value (for example, 0.5 seconds), and only the period in which the symbol is fluctuating may be set as the fluctuation period. Further, the period in which the symbol is fluctuating and the period in which the symbol is stopped and displayed may be defined in different tables.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 which is either left or right. It is acquired at the time of being stored, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the ordinary symbol per random symbol table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the ordinary symbol When it agrees with the value of the random number which is set by the per random number table, it is determined that the symbol is normal. In addition, this normal symbol per random number table is for low probability of normal symbol (during normal condition of normal symbol) and high probability of high probability of being hit of normal symbol from the low probability (of normal symbol) It is divided into two types, one for the time-saving state), and the number of random numbers for making a big hit included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit.

  As shown to Fig.9 (a), at the low probability of a normal symbol, there exist 24 random numbers which become a hit of a normal symbol, The range is "5-28". These random number values are stored in the random number per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

  If the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 of the normal symbol is The variable display is performed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as), and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "0.5 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, there are 200 random number values that become the jackpot of the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the random number per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 200, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2."

  If the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 of the normal symbol is The variable display is performed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as), and the first entrance 64 is opened “one second × twice”. Thus, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and furthermore, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first ball entry port 64. It should be noted that a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for “one second × 2 times” when the normal symbol comes into contact, but it is opened. The time and the number may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21). And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 31).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to various counters shown in FIG. 6, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 31), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 30) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 29) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 is a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, It has a counter 203e, an hour-time middle counter 203f, a special change-in-time counter 203g, a pre-read sure-time in-change counter 203h, and a counter buffer 203i.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas is a first random number counter C1. The respective values of the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball reaches the first entry slot 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4 th reserved area), areas with smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of a special symbol is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, the determination such as the drawing of the special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the ball wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), and as soon as each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, the big hit lottery of the original special symbol In addition to the above, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the values of the acquired counters C1 to C3. Thus, before the lottery of the original special symbol is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3) corresponding to the starting winning combination From now on, it is described that the prediction is made by prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. In addition, a pass / fail, stop classification, a fluctuation pattern etc. correspond as various information.

  Then, when the pre-reading is finished, a winning information command including various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the pass / fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information to save the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. Store in 223a.

  In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning combination when the start winning combination is achieved in the main control device 110. From this, various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is predicted (estimated).

  Then, various information predicted is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the prize information command, and the voice lamp control device 113 wins the prize information using various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the prize information command. It stores in the information storage area 223a. In addition, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, and the value of the special variation number counter 223e, the above-mentioned pseudo-interval effect is changed pattern of eight times It is determined whether to end the effect or to continue the effect more than eight times. Specifically, during the special variation period (that is, from the end of the jackpot to the time the lottery for the special symbol is performed eight times), the jackpot does not become a jackpot, and the 9-12th special symbol from the end of the jackpot by the prefetch If it is determined that a jackpot is made in the lottery, the pseudo-interval effect is extended until the jackpot is made. As a result, since it is possible to predict whether the jackpot will continue depending on the length of the rendering time, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game during the jackpot and during the pseudo interval.

  As described above, main controller 110 predicts, from each counter value acquired according to the start winning, various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning ( Voice lamp control is performed for complex processing such as processing to mainly estimate the process, and to determine whether to extend the pseudo-interval effect based on the various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern). This is performed by the device 113. Thereby, the processing in the main control device 110 can be concentrated on the lottery processing for drawing the gaming state to be transitioned based on the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64, which is the most important processing of the pachinko machine 10 On the other hand, if the MPU 221 with high processing ability is used as the sound lamp control device 113, various modes of pseudo interval effect can be set.

  The regular symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes either the left or right normal entry port 67, and the acquired data is obtained from Among the vacant areas of area 4), areas with smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  In addition, if you shift data from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area will be empty, so the prizes stored in the other reserved areas will be the same as in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed to pack data into a reserve area with a small area number. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination) It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of balls in the variable display increases until the maximum value of 8 is reached 1 Are added (see S604 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 22).

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 22 and S605 in FIG. 26). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the holding ball of the variation display held on the main control device 110 by the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display controlled by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is actually held in the main control 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if it deviates from that, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the number of balls command received next.

  The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-held-balls number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of held balls notified by the number-of-held-cells-for-display command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is the maximum number of holding balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and it is incremented by 1 up to the maximum value 4 each time the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. (See S604 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 27).

  If the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes either the left or right normal entry port 67, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S805 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes either the left or right normal ball entry port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. (S803 in FIG. 28: No).

  The odd variation counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the definite variation state (high probability state of special symbol) of the special symbol, and if the value of the odd variation counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 Indicates that the special symbol is in a definite variation state, and if the value of the counter 203e during positive variation is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal condition of the special symbol (low probability condition of the special symbol). The indeterminate counter 203e has an initial value set to zero and is a timing at which the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a closes in the final round of the big hit in the main controller 110 (ie, the big hit end timing). 12 is set each time it is determined that That is, when it becomes the big hit of the special symbol, 12 is simply set regardless of how many the value of the counter 203e during the probability change. Thereafter, while the value of the counter 203e during the probability change is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted every time the variation effect of the special symbol is finished (S216 in FIG. 22).

  When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) is executed by the MPU 201, a lottery of special symbols is performed. In the special symbol variation start process, the value of the probability variation counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, while the lottery of the special symbol is performed based on the first random number table 202a2 for high probability time, If the value of the probability variation counter 203e is 0, a lottery of special symbols is performed based on the first random number table 202a1 for low probability.

  The time saving counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol Indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol if the value of the time counter 203f is zero. At this time, the initial value of the counter 203f is set to zero, which is the timing at which the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a closes in the final round of the big hit in the main controller 110 (that is, the big hit ending timing) 8 is set each time it is determined that That is, when it becomes the big hit of the special symbol, 8 is simply set regardless of how many the value of the time counter 203f is. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted each time the variation effect of the special symbol is finished, until the value of the time counter 23f becomes 0 (S218 in FIG. 22).

  When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is to be made, the value of the time counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, a lottery for an ordinary symbol based on a random symbol table for high probability time. On the other hand, if the value of the time-span-middle counter 203f is 0, the lottery for the regular symbol is conducted based on the random symbol per symbol table for low probability (see S710 and S711 in FIG. 27).

  The special fluctuation in progress counter 203g is a counter that indicates whether or not it is the above-mentioned special fluctuation period. In selecting a variation pattern effect mode, if the value of the special variation in progress counter 203g is 1 or more, it indicates that it is a special variation period (that is, an execution period of pseudo interval effect), so the special variation pattern selection table 202e The mode of the variation pattern effect is selected with reference to (see FIG. 9C). On the other hand, if the value of the special variation in progress counter 203g is 0, it indicates that it is out of the special variation period, so the variation pattern effect mode is selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202d. Since the value of the special variation counter 203g is cleared to 0 when the power is turned on by operating the RAM erase switch 122, the power is turned on by operating the RAM erase switch 122 when opening a store or the like. And a normal state (a state in which the aspect of the fluctuation pattern presentation is selected with reference to the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d).

  As described above, in the special variation pattern selection table 202e (refer to FIG. 9C), the variation pattern of the variation period determined for each value of the special variation counter 203g (that is, every number of drawing times of special symbols) is selected Special fluctuation period (period from the end of the jackpot to the end of the 8 fluctuation patterns, or until the next jackpot within 8 times and the jackpot is started) Period) can be made the same period (8 seconds) each time. Therefore, it will be the next big hit by the time the lottery of the special symbol is performed 8 times after the big hit ends, and the period until the 1st round of the big hit is started (8 seconds until the big hit starts and the opening period And the execution period (10 seconds) of the interval presentation performed during the jackpot. Therefore, it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect to be executed during the jackpot and the pseudo interval effect, so it is difficult for the player to understand that the jackpot has ended, and it is also difficult to know how long the jackpot will last. be able to. Therefore, since it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting the jackpot to continue longer during the jackpot and during the pseudo interval, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  If the pachinko machine 10 is a special symbol when the prefetching result of the special symbol is pre-read based on the winning combination data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) acquired according to the starting winning combination, the preread probability change counter 203h pre-reads. Analyze winning data as if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal condition (special symbol low probability status) of the special symbol, if analysis of the winning data as a definite variation status (special symbol high probability status) should be done It is a counter which shows whether it should be done.

  If the value of the pre-reading probability variation counter 203h is 1 or more, the winning data is analyzed as the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol is prefetched. On the other hand, when the value of the pre-reading probability change counter 203h is 0, winning data is analyzed as that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol is pre-read. The pre-read probability change counter 203h is initialized to zero at the time of initial setting of the RAM (see S1014 in FIG. 30), and 12 is set each time it is determined that the pre-read lottery result is a big hit of a special symbol (See S612 in FIG. 26). That is, when it is pre-read that it is a jackpot of a special symbol, 12 is simply set anew regardless of how many the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203 h is. After that, while the value of the pre-reading certainty changing counter 203h is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted each time pre-reading of the drawing for the special symbol is completed (see S614 in FIG. 26).

  In addition, when the prefetching of the lottery in the special symbol is performed, if the value of the prefetching probability change counter 203h is 1 or more, the first hit random number table 202a2 for high probability time, the stop type selection table for high probability time, And each table of the special symbol jackpot classification table is compared with the winning data acquired according to the start winning. On the other hand, if the value of the pre-read certainty changing counter 203h is 0, each table of the first random number table 202a1 for low probability time, the stop type selection table for low probability time, and the special symbol jackpot type table, and start winning The data of the winning combination obtained according to is compared.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. As described above, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is provided with the ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data. The ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 8A is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control unit 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8A, the ROM 202 includes a first random number table 202a, a first type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, a variation pattern selection table 202d, and a special variation pattern selection. At least a table 202e is provided.

  As described above, the first random number table 202a is a table in which the value of the random number serving as the jackpot of the special symbol is defined. When the random number value specified in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. Also, the first random number table 202a includes a table (first random number table 202a1 for low probability) and a high for the special symbol for determining whether or not the special symbol is a big hit at the low probability of the special symbol. A table (first random number table 202a2 for high probability time) is provided to determine whether the special symbol is a big hit or not at the time of probability, and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each table is different. There is. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 8B) is a data table in which the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is set for each jackpot type. . As shown in FIG. 8 (b), if the value of the first collision type counter C2 stored in the first collision type counter buffer is in the range of 0 to 16, the current jackpot is "big hit A (3R big hit)" If it is determined that the value of the first collision type counter C2 is in the range of 17 to 31, it is determined that the current jackpot is "big hit B (4R jackpot)". Also, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 32 to 94, the current big hit is determined to be "big hit C (6R big hit)", and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 95 to 99 If there is, the jackpot of this time is determined to be "jackpot D (15R jackpot)".

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 9A) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 9A, when the low probability of the normal symbol (in the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C3 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28 In the case of, it is determined to be a hit of an ordinary symbol. In addition, as above-mentioned, when it is judged that it is a hit of a normal symbol, after the fluctuation display in the 2nd symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol of "o" is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). , And the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time".

  On the other hand, when the probability of the normal symbol is high (during the time reduction state of the normal symbol), it is determined that the second symbol is a hit of the normal symbol when the value of the random number counter C3 is in the range of 5 to 204. In addition, as above-mentioned, when it is judged that it is a hit of a normal symbol, after the fluctuation display in the 2nd symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol of "o" is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). , The motorized prize associated with the first ball entrance 64 is opened "one second x 2 times".

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 9B) is a data table used to determine the display pattern of the fluctuation pattern, and the display pattern is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9 (b), a selection table 202d1 for out-of-time for selecting the variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, and the lottery result of the special symbol is per hit. At least a win selection table 202d2 for selecting a variation pattern in the case where it is present is defined.

  The special variation selection table 202e (see FIG. 9C) is a data table used to determine the display mode of the variation pattern in the special variation period (that is, the execution period of the pseudo interval effect). In the special variation selection table 202e, a plurality of different tables corresponding to lottery results of special symbols are defined. Specifically, the out-of-time special selection table 202d1 (refer to FIG. 10A) for selecting the variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is out and the lottery result of the special symbol are the wins. At least the routine special selection table 202e2 (see FIG. 10 (b)) for selecting the fluctuation pattern in the case of the above case is defined. These out-of-time special selection table 202e1 and the on-time special selection table 202e2 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 10 (a) is a diagram showing the definition contents of the special selection table 202e1 for out of time defined in the special variation selection table 202e, and FIG. 10 (b) is the definition content of the special selection table 202e for win. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, in the special selection table for disconnection 202e1, the number of lottery times of the special symbol and the mode (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected are defined in association with each other. Specifically, when the special symbol lottery performed first or second after the end of the jackpot is out of variation, the variation pattern has a variation pattern of 2 seconds regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. (Special variation A) is selected. In addition, when the drawing of the special symbol performed for the third time or the fourth time after the big hit is out, the fluctuation pattern of 1 second is selected regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. . On the other hand, if the drawing of the special symbol performed the fifth to eighth after the big hit is out of lottery, the fluctuation pattern of 0.5 seconds of fluctuation time is selected regardless of the value of fluctuation type counter CS1. Ru.

  That is, if all eight of the special symbol lotterys have been missed since the jackpot was over, a total of eight seconds (2 seconds x 2 + 1 seconds x 2 + 0.5 seconds x 4) of 8 variation pattern effects are taken Run. Furthermore, the end display of the pseudo interval effect is performed in two seconds after the end of the variation pattern effect of eight times. Thereby, it is possible to fix the effect period of the pseudo interval effect to be performed after the end of the jackpot to 10 seconds. Therefore, since it is possible to match the effect period of the pseudo interval effect and the execution period of the interval effect to be executed during the big hit every time, it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect to be executed during the big hit and the pseudo interval effect. be able to. Therefore, since it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting the jackpot to continue longer during the jackpot and during the pseudo interval, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  In addition, the lottery number of the special symbol is judged based on the value of the special variation counter 203g. As described above, the special variation counter 203g is set to 8 at the end timing of the big hit, and is decremented by one each time the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, for example, if the value of the special variation counter 203g is 8, since the drawing of the special symbol is not performed even once after the big hit, it is determined that the drawing of the special symbol this time is the first drawing. . Also, for example, if the value of the special variation counter 203g is 3, it indicates that the special symbol lottery has been executed five times after the big hit, so it is determined that the current special symbol lottery is the sixth lottery. Do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10A, the winning selection special selection table 202e2 is also defined in association with the number of lottery times of the special symbol and the mode (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected. . Specifically, when the lottery of the special symbol performed for the first time after the end of the jackpot is a win, a variation pattern with a variation time of 8 seconds (special variation D) regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 Is selected. Also, if the second big win after the big win, the variation pattern (special variation E) with a variation time of 6 seconds is selected, and if the third big win after the big win, the variation time is 4 seconds If the fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation F) of is selected and the jackpot is the fourth after the end of the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation G) having a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected. Furthermore, when the jackpot is the fifth after the jackpot end, the fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation A) with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is selected, and when the jackpot is the sixth after the jackpot end, the fluctuation time is 1. If the variation pattern of 5 seconds (special variation H) is selected and the big hit is made 7 times after the big hit end, the variation pattern of 1 second (special variation B) is selected, and the 8th after the big hit ends In the case of a jackpot, a fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation C) having a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is selected.

  Each fluctuation time specified in the winning special selection table 202e is configured such that a period from the end of the previous big hit to the start of the next big hit is 8 seconds. For example, when it becomes a big hit in the third special symbol lottery after the big hit ends, as a variation pattern corresponding to the first and second special symbol lottery, the variation time from the special selection table 202e1 at the time of departure Is a 2 second variation pattern (special variation A) is selected. Further, as a variation pattern corresponding to the third special symbol lottery, a variation pattern with a variation time of 4 seconds (special variation F) is selected from the winning special selection table 202e2. Accordingly, the total of three fluctuation times is 8 seconds (2 seconds × 2 + 4 seconds).

  Even if it becomes a big hit by the number of drawing of a special symbol within 8 times after the big hit ends by constituting in this way, 8 seconds to the next big hit and 2 seconds of the opening period of the big hit (total The pseudo-interval effect can be performed during the 10 seconds). That is, regardless of whether or not the jackpot is won during the special variation period, the rendering period of the pseudo interval effect can be made the same, so it is difficult to understand whether or not the jackpot continues as a result of the pseudo interval performance. Can. Therefore, it is possible to make the player confirm the pseudo interval effect until the end while expecting the jackpot to continue after the pseudo interval effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the pseudo-interval effect.

  In addition, also when it becomes the big win with the lottery number of the special symbol within 8 times after the big hit ends, the execution period of the pseudo interval production and the execution period of the interval production executed during the big hit same period ( Can be 10 seconds). Therefore, it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect to be executed during the jackpot and the pseudo interval effect, so it is difficult for the player to understand that the jackpot has ended, and it is also difficult to know how long the jackpot will last. be able to. Therefore, since it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting the jackpot to continue longer during the jackpot and during the pseudo interval, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208. Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 29) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  When the payout control is executed, the winning balls are continuously dispensed one by one by the payout motor 216. More specifically, one winning ball is paid out each time the amount of rotation of the payout motor 216 reaches a predetermined amount (for example, one rotation). Further, the rotational speed of the payout motor 216 is set so that the payout motor 216 dispenses a predetermined number (10) of prize balls in a predetermined time (10 seconds). In addition, each time a predetermined number (10) of the winning balls are paid out, the payout of the winning balls is suspended only for a predetermined period (one second). Thereby, for example, when it is necessary to pay out a large number of winning balls continuously, for example, a big hit, the paying out motor 216 continues to pay out the winning balls without a break, thereby suppressing the heat generation of the paying out motor 216 be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the breakdown of the pachinko machine 10 due to the resin portion and the elastic body portion of the pachinko machine 10 melting due to the heat generation of the dispensing motor 216. In addition, the heat generated in the payout motor 216 is transmitted to the touchable portion of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the portion touched by the player such as the lower tray unit 15 and the handle 51), causing the player to be injured such as burns. Can be suppressed. The number of payouts and the suspension period of the payout until the payout motor 216 stops the payout of the winning balls are not limited to the above, and may be arbitrarily determined as long as the heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed. it can. For example, each time the payout motor 216 dispenses five or twenty-five balls, the payout may be stopped. Also, for example, the pause period may be 0.5 seconds or 3 seconds.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), Setting control of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, or at the time of super reach The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  Here, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 11A, the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern table 222a and a special variation pattern table 222b. The variation pattern table 222a and the special variation pattern table 222b are referred to select a detailed aspect of the variation pattern presentation based on the aspect of the rough variation pattern presentation notified from the main controller 110 by the variation pattern command. Table. The variation pattern table 222a is referred to when selecting a variation pattern effect mode to be performed after the ninth round of the big hit (that is, after the end of the pseudo interval effect). On the other hand, the special variation pattern table 222b is referred to when selecting the aspect of the variation pattern presentation performed within eight times (that is, within the execution period of the pseudo interval presentation) after the end of the jackpot. Note that, as described above, the variation pattern effect performed in the pseudo interval effect refers to, for example, a mode in which the main symbol is shrunk and variably displayed such that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize. By configuring in this manner, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the interval effect during the jackpot and the pseudo interval effect. Therefore, when it becomes a jackpot of a special symbol again after pseudo interval production, it can be made to feel as if the special gaming state continues from the previous jackpot. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11B, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, and a stop type selection flag 223d. Is at least provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning combination when the start winning combination is achieved in the main control device 110. The main control unit 110 predicts (estimates) various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when the drawing of the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning combination is performed, and the predicted various information is The main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, the various information (pass, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area), the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). Be done. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to an earlier winning is stored, and data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored in the first area. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special variation period ends, the winning information storage area 223a is referred to, and the jackpot will be a big hit until the special symbol lottery is executed four times after the special variation period ends. It has been determined. Then, when it is determined that there is a jackpot, the pseudo interval effect is extended until the jackpot is started. As a result, since it is possible to predict whether the jackpot will continue depending on the length of the rendering time, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game during the jackpot and during the pseudo interval.

  Similar to the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control unit 110, the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is a fluctuation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter which counts and holds the number of balls (waiting number) of the holding of the fluctuation effect held in the main control unit 110 up to four times.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of holding balls with the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variation display is added by entering the ball into first entrance 64, or the variation display in the special symbol is executed in main controller 110. When the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command. The symbol holding ball number counter 223b is stored (see S1607 in FIG. 36). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223 b is used to display the number-of-held-ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of {circle over (1)}, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball number for the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled to display the symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223 b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1701 in FIG. 37), and is turned off when the setting of the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1902 in FIG. 39). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1604 in FIG. 36), and is turned off when the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1907 in FIG. 39). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type (in the case of a large hit, a large hit type) extracted from the received stop type command is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the fluctuation effect is performed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation display (variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81) Effects and continuous advance notice effects are controlled. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 29) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, the flow of the pseudo-interval effect performed in the special variation period after the jackpot and the jackpot end will be described. FIG. 12 shows that in the pseudo-interval effect executed after "big hit D (15 R big hit)", it indicates that the big hit is finished (that is, the drawing results of the 8 special symbols after the big hit are all out) Case) is shown.

  The upper diagram in FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the transition of the effects performed before and after the jackpot and the transition of the state of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a in comparison. As shown in FIG. 12, when the symbol displayed stop after the symbol variation due to the variation pattern effect is the symbol corresponding to the big hit, the big hit is started. When the jackpot is started, a two-second opening effect is performed. In this opening presentation, a presentation of an aspect of blessing that the player has newly won a jackpot is executed. For example, the boy displayed in the sub display area Ds2 (see FIG. 4B) is normally displayed on the entire third symbol display device 81, and the player is given the word "Congratulations" and a word of congratulation to the player. It is an effect etc. to be described.

  When this opening effect is finished, the round effect of the first round is started. In each round of the jackpot, since it is possible for the player to obtain a larger number of prize balls (game value) than in the normal time, in the round effect, a presentation is performed that indicates that the prize ball (game value) will be obtained. For example, a boy who usually appears in the sub display area Ds2 (see FIG. 4 (b)) enters a room of a treasure filled with gold and silver treasure and acquires a large amount of treasure to delight him. Etc. In addition, when the first round is started, the special winning opening (large opening) 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds pass or 10 balls are won). Ru. By the ball winning to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, the player can obtain a larger number of winning balls (game value) than usual.

  Thereafter, when the closing condition (for example, 30 seconds has elapsed or 10 balls are won) of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is established, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed and the interval effect is produced. Is executed. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20, this interval effect continues for 10 seconds, and an effect of notifying whether or not the next round is started is performed depending on whether the door is opened or not. . This door is, for example, the door of the next treasure room. Then, the door opening effect is performed, and when the start of the next round is notified, the round effect of the second round is started, and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened. In the second round of the round effect, as in the first round, for example, the player can get a prize ball, such as an effect in which a boy enters the room of a treasure from the door and gets a lot of treasure and is delighted An effect that suggests

  Then, when the closing condition (for example, 30 seconds has elapsed or 10 balls are won) of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is established, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is the same as in the first round. While being closed, interval rendition is performed. This interval effect is an effect for notifying whether or not the next round is started depending on whether or not the door is opened as described above.

  And also after the third round, the round effect and the interval effect are alternately executed in conjunction with the open / close state of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

  In addition, round production does not necessarily need to perform the same production in each round. For example, in the even round, a boy performs an effect (first round effect) for acquiring a large amount of treasure in a room of a treasure, and in an odd round, an effect (second round effect) in which a girl (not shown) relaxes at a resort beach ) May be performed. Also, for example, the above two types of effects may be randomly selected in each round. Moreover, you may provide the presentation which can be selected only in rounds other than the last round of a jackpot. For example, in the rounds other than the final round, the second round effect described above is selected to have a lower probability than the first round effect, and in the final round of the jackpot, only the first round effect is selected It may be configured to be able to With this configuration, the player can be made to recognize that one or more rounds of the jackpot remain by displaying the second round effect. That is, only by the second round effect being displayed, it is possible to recognize that the opportunity to obtain a large number of winning balls is given one or more times, so that the second round effect is executed, It is possible to give the player a great sense of satisfaction.

  In addition, in the 15th round, which is the final round of "big hit D (15R big hit)", the closing condition (for example, 30 seconds has elapsed or 10 balls have won) is established for the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a. When the jackpot is over, the pseudo-interval effect is executed. In this pseudo-interval effect, the same effect as the above-described interval effect (that is, an effect in which a boy opens the door) is performed in eight seconds after the start of the effect. After that (that is, 8 seconds to 10 seconds after the start of the pseudo-interval effect), an effect that succeeds in opening the door or an effect that fails to open the door is basically performed. In addition, although the details will be described later, in the case where the variation pattern effect of the special symbol is executed during the pseudo interval effect, the main symbol is reduced in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the player Executes the fluctuation pattern effect (in a mode in which it is difficult to notice that the fluctuation pattern effect is being executed).

  The control during the pseudo interval effect will be described in detail with reference to the lower side of FIG. As shown on the lower side of FIG. 12, after the big hit ends, the special variation period is set. In this special variation period, as described above, the variation pattern effect mode is selected from the special variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 9C). In the example of FIG. 12, all eight random symbol drawings out of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot are out, so all the variations pattern effect mode of eight times is out of time special selection table 202e1 (see FIG. 10 (a)) It is selected from That is, in the first and second variation pattern effects performed after the end of the jackpot, a variation pattern (special variation A) with a variation time of 2 seconds (pattern variation 1.6 seconds + stop display 0.4 seconds) is selected The variation pattern (special variation B) with a variation time of 1 second (pattern variation 0.6 seconds + stop display 0.4 seconds) is selected in the third and fourth variation pattern effects after the big hit end , The fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation C) with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds (pattern fluctuation 0.1 second + definite display 0.4 seconds) is selected in the fluctuation pattern rendition to be performed 5 to 8 after the big hit end Ru.

  That is, eight fluctuation pattern effects are executed over a total of 8 seconds (2 seconds × 2 + 1 seconds × 2 + 0.5 seconds × 4) after the end of the jackpot. Thus, it is possible to fix a period (special variation period) in which eight variation pattern effects are performed after the end of the jackpot is fixed to eight seconds. Therefore, since the execution period of the pseudo interval effect and the execution period of the interval effect performed during the big hit can be matched each time, it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect performed during the big hit and the pseudo interval effect. be able to. Therefore, since it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting the jackpot to continue longer during the jackpot and during the pseudo interval, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  In addition, after all the variation pattern effects of eight times are finished, an end effect of 2 seconds to finish the pseudo interval effect is executed. Specifically, for the player that the next round is not started (that is, the previous round was the final round of the jackpot) by performing the above-described effect of failing to open the door. Suggest. When this finish effect is being executed, if the variation pattern effect is being executed in the mode of being reduced to the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81, it is scaled down and executed after the end effect is finished. The fluctuation pattern effect which has been used is returned to the normal display size. That is, the variation pattern effect is executed by returning to the aspect illustrated in FIG. As described above, after the special variation period has elapsed (that is, the drawing of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot), the variation pattern effect is selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202d. Further, in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, an aspect of fluctuation pattern effect of 5 seconds to 30 seconds is defined. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern effect that is executed after the end of the special fluctuation period is a fluctuation time that is longer than the end effect (two seconds). In this case, when the variation pattern effect being executed is kept reduced even though the end effect has passed, most of the third symbol display device 81 is not displayed at all. In some cases, the player may misidentify that the pachinko machine 10 has a problem. Therefore, after the pseudo-interval effect is completed, the display mode of the variation pattern effect is returned to the normal size, and the player is prevented from being misidentified as having a defect in the gaming machine.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the case of becoming a big hit again after pseudo-interval effect will be described. FIG. 13 (a) is a diagram showing a case where the jackpot becomes the big win in the first drawing of the special symbol after the jackpot is finished, and FIG. 13 (b) is the third special symbol after the jackpot is finished FIG. 13C is a view showing a case of becoming a big hit in the 12th special symbol drawing after the big hit is finished.

  As shown in FIG. 13 (a), if it becomes the big win in the first special symbol lottery after the big win is over, the variation time is obtained from the winning special selection table 202e2 (see FIG. 10 (b)). A variation pattern effect of 8 seconds is selected. This makes it possible to set the period from the end of the jackpot to the start of the next jackpot to 8 seconds. In addition, a period of 2 seconds (opening period) is provided between the start of the jackpot and the start of the first round. Therefore, the period from the end of the jackpot to the start of the first round of the next jackpot (period of pseudo interval presentation) is made to coincide with the execution period (10 seconds) of the interval presentation executed during the jackpot Since it can be performed, it can be made difficult to distinguish between interval production performed during a big hit and pseudo-interval performance. Therefore, since it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting the jackpot to continue longer during the jackpot and during the pseudo interval, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  In addition, when it becomes the big hit in the third drawing of the special symbol after the big hit is finished, the aspect of the variation pattern effect executed at the first time and the second time is selected from the special selection table 202e1 for out of time . Further, the mode of the variation pattern effect to be executed for the third time is selected from the hit special selection table 202e2. As a result, as shown in FIG. 13 (b), a variation pattern having a variation time of 2 seconds is selected as the variation pattern effect to be executed first and second after the end of the jackpot, and the jackpot ends. Since fluctuation pattern production with a fluctuation time of 4 seconds is selected as the fluctuation pattern production to be executed for the third time since then, the period from the end of the jackpot to the start of the next jackpot shall be 8 seconds. Can. Therefore, the period from the end of the jackpot to the start of the first round of the next jackpot (period of pseudo interval presentation) is made to coincide with the execution period (10 seconds) of the interval presentation executed during the jackpot Since it can be performed, it can be made difficult to distinguish between interval production performed during a big hit and pseudo-interval performance. Therefore, since it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting the jackpot to continue longer during the jackpot and during the pseudo interval, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  In addition, when it is determined that all 8 special symbol lots will go out after the jackpot is over and the special fluctuation period will end up with the fourth reading after the end of the special fluctuation period by prefetching, The modes of all variation pattern effects during the special variation period are selected from the out-time special selection table 202e1. As a result, in the first and second variation pattern effects performed after the end of the jackpot, a variation pattern (special variation A) with a variation time of 2 seconds is selected, and the third and fourth times after the jackpot end are performed. In the fluctuation pattern effect, the fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation B) with fluctuation time of 1 second is selected, and in the fluctuation pattern production performed for the fifth to eighth times after the big hit end, the fluctuation pattern of 0.5 second (special Variation C) is selected. That is, eight fluctuation pattern effects are executed over a total of 8 seconds (2 seconds × 2 + 1 seconds × 2 + 0.5 seconds × 4) after the end of the jackpot.

  In addition, the variation pattern effect mode to be executed first to third times after the end of the special variation period is selected from the out-of-time selection table 202d1, and the variation pattern effect of the fourth time is executed after the end of the special variation period. An aspect is selected from the hit selection table 202d2. In this case, even after the special variation period is over, the pseudo-interval effect is extended until the next jackpot. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 is controlled such that the pseudo interval effect is continued over 12 variation pattern effects after the end of the big hit. As a result, since it is possible to predict whether the jackpot will continue depending on the length of the rendering time, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game during the jackpot and during the pseudo interval. The period of the interval effect and the period of the pseudo interval effect are not limited to 10 seconds, and can be arbitrarily determined, for example, 5 seconds or 15 seconds.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  In the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is stored in the character ROM 234. Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d as the buffer RAM And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 40) executed after the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 40) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 17) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 42B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (such as mask ROM and EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on time variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power on, and the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect when it is done.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 40). Since it is desirable that these images be displayed promptly after the power is turned on, they are composed of simple display images with a small amount of data as compared to image data displayed at normal times.

  When image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 Image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power on to display the third image at the power on main image. Display on 81

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power on. On the display screen of, the power-on fluctuation image of the “o” symbol and the power-on fluctuation image of the “x” symbol in the same position as the “o” symbol are alternately displayed repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. The result is judged, and if it is "big hit of special symbol", "○" symbol is displayed for a certain period after stopping the change production, and if it is "out of special symbol", "×" symbol is after the change production stop Display for a fixed period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the power change image area when the power is turned on. The power-on-time change image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on time change image resident on 235b, and the "o" symbol and the "x" symbol are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately it can.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numerals "0" to "9" being the third symbol are resident. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64, although the fluctuation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, the fluctuation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unintended condition.

  In the third symbol area 235d, characters such as a main symbol with a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character with a rear symbol, a flannel, a helmet, etc. as a main symbol without the numbers “0” to “9” Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message pictorial area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the graphic area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is predetermined.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, variation effects, round effects A display data table corresponding to interval production, pseudo interval production, and demonstration performance is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern command for display is received, the stop type command for display indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If the jackpot is either C or jackpot D, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now. Interval production is production performed between the end of each round of the jackpot and the start of the next round. As described above, the pseudo-interval effect is an effect to be executed after the end of the jackpot, and the same effect as the interval effect is executed. In addition, when the start condition is satisfied during this pseudo interval effect, the fluctuation effect is reduced and displayed on the lower right of the screen.

  The demonstration effect is, as described above, an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to a round effect, an interval effect, a pseudo interval effect, and a demonstration effect. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type indicates which of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage") is displayed, or the back surface A to C Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. Moreover, when specifying to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. Also, the range of the rear view image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C, the rear surface image to be displayed is specified from the rear surface type.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table "0000H" describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 15) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 17) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 . Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident data among the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Are described (the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 16 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (meaning the address “0002H” in FIG. 16).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 16) In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 17) described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 16, when the pointer 233 f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2005 in FIG. 40). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S3705 in FIG. 51 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 42B) and the simplified display setting process (figure in FIG. 42B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 42 (b) (see S2309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 43 to 47) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 48 to 50) are performed.

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3601 in FIG. 51A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Since resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 51B) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 17) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction for the image is described is generated. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 17) describing the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 17) described later (see FIG. 17) describing the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process for one frame is completed (FIG. In step S2303), the pointer updating process (see S3305 in FIG. 48) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. The transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer is to be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while creating (see FIG. 17), and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 16, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as a pattern). Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame is generated based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number symbol 1, holding ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed (FIG. Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3307 in FIG. 48). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" which indicates that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Then, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233i is performed when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3813 in FIG. 52). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S3814 in FIG. 52). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is zero, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is one. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3902 in FIG. 53).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 42B) is executed (see S3902 in FIG. 53).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  Then, with reference to FIGS. 18-20, the example of the pseudo | simulation interval presentation performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. In the following description, a pseudo interval effect to be executed after the end of "big hit A (3R big hit)" will be described as an example. FIG. 18A is a diagram showing an example of the effect to be executed at the start of the pseudo interval effect. As shown in FIG. 18A, a horizontally long rectangular area is provided in the upper left portion of the third symbol display device 81, and the number of rounds digested before the pseudo interval effect starts is displayed in the inside of the area. It is configured to be. In this example, since the pseudo-interval effect is executed after the round number of 3 rounds of big hit (big hit A), the character "ROUND3" is displayed in a rectangular area. In addition, a boy appears in the lower left of the third symbol display device 81, and an effect of finding a door displayed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81 is performed. In the pseudo-interval effect, an effect that a boy tries to open this door is executed.

  Further, in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation pattern effect is reduced and displayed (that is, in a mode in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize). In addition, the difference between the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the pseudo interval effect and the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the interval effect performed during the big hit is the fluctuation pattern effect Is only displayed in a reduced size. That is, since the interval effect is performed during the jackpot, there is no drawing of a special symbol and no variation pattern effect is performed, so nothing is displayed on the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81 . Therefore, except that the variation pattern effect is displayed in a reduced size, the same display image is displayed in the interval effect and the pseudo interval effect, and the variation pattern effect is displayed in a reduced size to the extent that visual recognition is difficult . This makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between the interval effect and the pseudo-interval effect.

  In addition, the method of making the visual recognition of the fluctuation pattern effect difficult is not limited to this. For example, it may be difficult to visually recognize by displaying the fluctuation pattern effect in a semi-transparent manner during the pseudo interval effect. Further, not only during pseudo-interval effect production but also during the interval effect production of the big hit, the pseudo variation pattern effect may be displayed in a reduced size in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81. In the case of displaying the fluctuation pattern effect in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81 in a reduced size, the portion displayed in a reduced size may be configured to be always hidden by the electric combination or the like. In addition, the electric combination may operate only during the interval effect of the big hit and during the pseudo interval effect, so as to hide the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the interval effect and the pseudo interval effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern effect is merely displayed in a reduced size at the lower right portion, but may be displayed in a different manner. For example, during pseudo-interval effect production, the main symbol may be displayed by a symbol other than a number, and this may be a different mode. As a result, even if the player is noticed that the fluctuation pattern effect is displayed in a reduced size during the special fluctuation period, it can be made difficult to understand whether the result of the fluctuation pattern effect is hit or not. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the jackpot will start again or not be the jackpot until the result of the pseudo interval production is confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to observe the result of the pseudo interval effect with interest.

  Further, during the special variation period, the stop display period may be configured to be extremely short (for example, to be 0.1 second). As a result, even if the player notices that the fluctuation pattern effect is displayed in a reduced size during the special fluctuation period, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the result of the fluctuation pattern effect, and the player constantly sees the fact during the special fluctuation period. It can be made to feel as if the design is shrunk and keeps fluctuating. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the result of the variation pattern presentation performed during the special variation period is a hit or a drop. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the jackpot will start again or not be the jackpot until the result of the pseudo-interval presentation is confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to observe the result of the pseudo-interval effect with interest.

  On the other hand, the period of symbol variation may be configured to be extremely short (for example, to be 0.1 seconds) to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the symbol is varying. This makes it possible to recognize that what is displayed in the lower right part is only a list of meaningless numbers, and whether the result of the variation pattern presentation performed during the special variation period is a hit or miss It can be confusing. Moreover, when shortening the period of symbol variation, you may comprise so that fake effect may be displayed in the period of a stop display. For example, the stop symbol may be displayed for a moment, and the remaining time may execute fake symbol variation. In addition, the symbol may be configured to be transparent during stop display. By these, it is possible to make it hard to understand whether the result of the fluctuation pattern presentation performed during the special fluctuation period is a hit or miss, so is the jackpot started again until the result of the pseudo interval presentation is confirmed? It can be hard to understand if it won't make a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to observe the result of the pseudo-interval effect with interest.

  Returning to FIG. 18, the description will be continued. In the special variation period, when it is a big hit of the special symbol, as shown in FIG. 18 (b), in the pseudo interval effect, the door that the boy was trying to open is opened, and the display of “+1 ROUND” from the door A presentation is made to appear. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the jackpot new round is started, and the player can be pleased. In addition, the effect that this door is opened is performed in a period from the start of the next jackpot to the start of the first round of the next jackpot. In addition, when it becomes a big hit again via pseudo | simulation interval production, the display of the number of rounds is comprised so that it may be displayed from the continuation of the last round of the big hit completed last time. Therefore, after the display of "+1 ROUND" appears in the example of FIG. 18 (b) (when the big change occurs again in the special change period after the "big hit A (3 rounds big hit)" ends), "4 ROUND" is displayed. Thereafter, every time the number of rounds increases, the display of the area for displaying the number of rounds provided in the upper left portion of the third symbol display device 81 also increases by one.

  On the other hand, when it does not become a big hit of the special symbol in the special variation period, as shown in FIG. 19 (a), in the special variation end display period (see FIG. 12) after the end of the special variation period, the boy It is not possible to open the door and an effect of crying out is executed. Furthermore, after the boy makes a cry, as shown in FIG. 19 (b), a woman appears on the third symbol display device 81, and the effect of displaying the character "Mone!" Is executed. Ru. By displaying in this manner, the player can easily recognize that the jackpot has ended. In addition, the effect during the special fluctuation period is the same as the case of the big hit during the special fluctuation, and only the effect executed after the end of the special fluctuation period (that is, the effect of notifying the result of the pseudo interval effect) is It is comprised so that it may perform in a different aspect according to whether it becomes. By configuring in this way, it is possible to share eight seconds of effects performed during the special variation period regardless of whether or not a big hit occurs during the special variation period, so the character of the display control device 114 The capacity of the ROM 234 can be reduced.

  In addition, it is the case where it does not become the big hit of the special symbol in the special fluctuation period, when it is decided that it becomes the big hit by the drawing of the special symbol within 4 times by the pre-reading, the effect that the boy starts crying After that, the effect shown in FIG. 20 (b) is executed. That is, a rectangular area appears at the upper right of the third symbol display device 81, and the characters "open the door by button continuous hit!" Are displayed. Further, on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, an image of the hand pressing the frame button 22 is displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the chance for the jackpot to continue is left, and the player can participate in the effect by pressing the frame button 22.

  The effect (see FIG. 20A) for prompting the user to press the frame button 22 continues until the fluctuation pattern effect which is a big hit is performed. Then, an effect (see FIG. 18B) in which the door is opened is performed in two seconds before the end of the fluctuation pattern effect which is a big hit. Furthermore, a woman appears as shown in FIG. 20 (b) in a period (opening period) from the jackpot to the start of the first round (the opening period), and the character "I did it" is displayed A presentation is performed. By this effect, the player can easily recognize that the jackpot will continue.

  In addition, the effects performed in the interval production and the pseudo interval production are not limited to the effects that open the door, suggesting that the jackpot will continue (or, the jackpot has ended once and became a new jackpot) As long as the effect to be performed and the effect to indicate that the jackpot is finished are provided, the aspect of the effect may be determined arbitrarily. For example, it is suggested that the allies of justice execute the direction to fight against the enemy, and the direction to win the enemy continues the jackpot (or that the jackpot has ended once and becomes a new jackpot), to the enemy By defeating, it may be configured to indicate that the jackpot ends.

  Moreover, the effect (see FIG. 20A) for prompting the user to press the frame button 22 does not necessarily have to be performed after the boy performs the crying effect. After the boy makes a crying effect, another effect may be performed, and thereafter, an effect (see FIG. 20A) may be performed to urge the frame button 22 to be pressed. For example, the boy may perform an effect of discovering another door, and thereafter may perform an effect (see FIG. 20A) prompting the user to press the frame button 22. Also, in this case, the time until the next jackpot is determined by prefetching, and it is configured to determine in advance the timing to start executing the effect (see FIG. 20A) prompting the user to press the frame button 22. You may Thereby, the execution period of the effect (see FIG. 20A) for prompting the user to press the frame button 22 can be made the same period each time. Therefore, when the time until the big hit is long, the effect (see FIG. 20A) which urges the pressing of the frame button 22 continues to be displayed for a long time, and it is suppressed that the player is tired of pressing the frame button The effect can be performed only for a period appropriate for executing the effect (see FIG. 20A) for pressing the frame button 22.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot does not occur during the special fluctuation period, the aspect of the fluctuation pattern effect from the ninth time onward after the end of the jackpot is selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d. It is not limited to this. For example, in the ninth to twelfth special symbol lottery (that is, the remaining period of the high probability state of the special symbol after the special variation period is over), the variation pattern presentation mode (variation time) from different data tables It may be configured to select. For example, in the case where the lottery result of the ninth special symbol is out, it may be configured such that a fluctuation pattern effect of 2 seconds is always selected. As a result, when the end of the big hit is notified as a result of the pseudo interval effect, the second variation pattern effect of 2 seconds which is the effect period of the notification effect of the end (see FIGS. 19 (a) and 19 (b)) Can be matched with the fluctuation time of That is, the end timing of the effect (see FIGS. 19 (a) and 19 (b)) for notifying the end of the jackpot can be matched with the end timing of the ninth variation pattern effect. Therefore, until the ninth variation pattern effect, the variation pattern effect is reduced and displayed in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81, and in the tenth and subsequent variation pattern effects, from the start time of the effect in the normal mode Since it is only necessary to execute the fluctuation pattern effect, it is not necessary to cancel the reduction display in the middle of the fluctuation pattern effect. Therefore, display control can be simplified.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when there is a holding ball that will be a big hit by prefetching at the end of the special variation period, an effect (see FIG. 20A) for prompting the button to be pressed is executed. Not limited to this. For example, in the case of becoming a big hit during the special variation period, an effect (see FIG. 20 (a)) for prompting the user to press the button is performed using the big win opening period with a predetermined probability (for example, 10%). It may be configured. Specifically, at the start of the opening effect, the effect shown in FIG. 19 (a) is made to cry when the boy shown in FIG. 19 (a) is executed, and then the effect (see FIG. 20 (a)) prompting the user to press the button It may be configured to execute in the remaining time. In a jackpot that performs an effect (see FIG. 20A) for prompting the user to press the button during the opening period, the opening period is set to be longer than 2 seconds (for example, 10 seconds) and an effect that prompts the user to press the button (See FIG. 20A) may be displayed long. This makes it possible to give the player an impression as to whether the jackpot will continue if the button is pressed, thereby further enhancing the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  In addition, even when there is no holding ball serving as a big hit, an effect (see FIG. 20A) may be performed to urge the button to be pressed with a certain probability (for example, 5%). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it unclear whether or not the jackpot will continue only by the appearance of the effect (see FIG. 20A) that urges the button to be pressed. It can be interesting. Furthermore, even when the result of the effect (see FIG. 20A) prompting the user to press the button is out, the effect is ended in accordance with the end of one of the ninth to twelfth variable pattern effects. You may In this case, when it comes off, the effect may be easily ended according to the end of the small number of fluctuation pattern effects. That is, the probability of being notified that the result of the effect (see FIG. 20A) prompting the user to press the button is out of alignment with the end of the ninth variation pattern effect is set high, and the twelfth variation pattern effect The probability of being notified that the vehicle is out of alignment may be set low in accordance with the end of the event. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to recognize that the player's expectation for the jackpot continuation is high as the effect (see FIG. 20 (a)) for pressing the button continues for a long time. Therefore, since it is possible to press the button while wishing that the effect (see FIG. 20A) for pressing the button continues for a long time, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<About control processing of main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIG. 21 to FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment) There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When 299, 99, 99, 239) are reached, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 while executing processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104), and thereafter, The start winning process associated with the winning on the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is executed (S105). In addition, the details of the special symbol variation process (S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for performing display in the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process accompanying the passage of the ball in the normal ball inlet 67 Is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing (S106) and the through gate passing processing (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device It is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81, and the like.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S201). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: Yes), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is If it is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation A holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 31) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c from the holding ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223 .

  After setting the holding ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If has not passed (S209: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S210), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S211). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol variation start process is executed, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, if it is the big hit of the special symbol, it will be big hit A, big hit B, big hit C or big hit D depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2 Is determined.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when it becomes big hit A, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when it comes to big hit B, the red LED is turned on, and when it comes to big hit C. The red LED and the blue LED are turned on, and in the case of the jackpot D, the red LED, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S211 is completed, when the variable display under execution is started in the first symbol display device 37, the display of the special symbol performed by the special symbol fluctuation start process (this lottery result) is a special It is determined whether it is a jackpot of symbols (S212). Then, if the current lottery result is the big hit of the special symbol (S212: Yes), the start of the big hit is set (S213), and the process proceeds to S220. Specifically, the setting performed in the process of S213 is setting of an opening start command for output to the audio lamp control device 113 or the like. The opening start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of an effect mode to be executed in the opening period of the big hit, and is set including information indicating whether or not the big hit has occurred in the special variation period. That is, in the process of S213, when the special variation in progress counter 203g is larger than 0 (that is, when the present is in the special variation period), the opening start command corresponding to the jackpot of the special variation period is set. When 203 g is 0 (ie, when the current is not in the special variation period), the opening start command corresponding to the normal jackpot is set. Based on the opening start command, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 opens the door in the pseudo interval effect, and makes it appear as if the big hit state continues from the previous big hit (see FIG. 18B). Or any of the usual opening effects (for example, effects to celebrate winning the jackpot).

  The opening start command set in the process of S213 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 31) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the opening start command, it determines from the opening start command whether or not it is a jackpot of the special variation period, and controls to display a display opening start command corresponding to the jackpot state. It transmits to the apparatus 114 (refer S1619 of FIG. 36). The display control device 114 having received the display opening start command displays a normal opening (not shown) or an opening for a special variation period (see FIG. 19B) based on the display opening command (see FIG. 19B). See S2420 in FIG. 43).

  On the other hand, in the process of S212, if the lottery result this time is a special symbol out of place (S212: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203e during definite variation is larger than 0 (S214). If it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S214: Yes), the value of the in-progress change counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S215), and the process proceeds to S216. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter 203e is 0 (S214: No), the process of S215 is skipped and the process proceeds to S216.

  In the subsequent processing of S216, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is greater than 0 (S216). The value 203f is decremented by 1 (S217), and the process proceeds to S218. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S218.

  In the process of S218, it is determined whether the value of the special variation in progress counter 203g is greater than 0 (S218), and if it is determined that the value of the special variation in progress counter 203g is greater than 0 (S218: Yes), the special variation is The value of the middle counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S219), and the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special variation in progress counter 203g is 0 (S218: No), the process of S219 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S220.

  In the process of S220 executed after the process of S213, S218 or S219, the lighting of the LED which is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S211 and the third symbol display device 81 A stop command is set in order to tune the fluctuation stop of (S220).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). The special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. It is a process for determining the production pattern (the fluctuation production pattern) of the fluctuation production performed with the 1st symbol display 37 and the 3rd symbol display 81 based on the value of the various counters stored in.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the lottery result of the special symbol stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the first hit type counter C2, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 are obtained (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the special variation in progress counter 203g of the RAM 203 is larger than 0 (S302). The special variation in progress counter 203g indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special variation state (that is, a state in which the variation pattern presentation mode is selected from the special variation pattern selection table 202e when executing the variation pattern presentation). If it is a counter and the value of the special variation counter 203g is larger than 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special variation state of the special symbol, and if the value of the special variation counter 203g is 0, the pachinko machine 10 is It shows that it is a normal state (that is, a state of selecting a mode of the fluctuation pattern effect from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d when executing the fluctuation pattern effect).

  When it is determined in the process of S302 that the special variation in progress counter 203g is 0 (S302: No), the normal variation selection process is executed (S303). Here, the details of the normal variation selection process (S303) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the normal variation selection process (S303). This normal variation selection process is a process for determining the aspect of the variation pattern effect to be executed from the variation pattern selection table 202d.

  In this normal variation selection process, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S301 is the jackpot of the special symbol (S401). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the big hit of the four types of special symbols (big hit Of A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first collision type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 16", it is determined that the jackpot A (3R jackpot), and if it is in the range of "17 to 31", the jackpot B (4R jackpot) If it is in the range of "32 to 94", it is judged that jackpot C (6R jackpot) and if it is in the range of "95 to 99" jackpot D (15R jackpot) It determines with it being (refer FIG.8 (b)).

  When it is determined in the process of S401 that the jackpot of the special symbol is determined (S401: Yes), the display mode at the time of big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301. (S402). In the process of S402, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set in accordance with the determined jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type in the third symbol display device 81, the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot is determined based on the winning selection table 202d2 (S403). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S403, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 9B).

  For example, as variation patterns for outliers, various types such as "displacement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short duration)", "disappearing normal reach", "disappearing super reach", and "disappearing special reach" are defined. As the variation pattern of jackpot A · jackpot B · jackpot C · jackpot D sharing, "common share normal reach" various, "shared super reach" various, "shared special reach" various are defined, fluctuation for jackpot C · jackpot D As the pattern, various "special reach" are defined.

  In the process of S401, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S401: No), the display mode of out is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and set to the display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a Based on the type of stop to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. For example, as the type of stop, "reach before and after out of reach", "reach other than before and after out of reach", and "complete out of reach" are defined.

  Next, a variation pattern of outliers is determined based on the outlier selection table 202d1 (S405). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S403, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach or super reach based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determine the time. When the processing of S403 or the processing of S405 is finished, the present processing is finished and the processing returns to the special symbol variation start processing.

  Returning to FIG. 23, the description will be continued. When it is determined that the value of the special variation in progress counter 203g is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), a special variation selection process is executed (S304). Here, the details of the special variation selection process (S304) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the special variation selection process (S304).

  In this special variation selection process, similarly to the normal variation selection process (S303), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S301 is the jackpot of the special symbol (S501). If it is determined that the jackpot is determined (S501: Yes), a jackpot display mode is set based on the value of the first collision type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S502). The specific content is the same as the setting (S402) of the display mode at the time of the jackpot of the normal variation selection process (S303). In addition, it is not necessary to be the same as the setting (S402) of the display mode of the big hit, for example, prepare a table different from the first hit type selection table 202b used in the normal change selection process (S303) An aspect may be set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined based on the special selection table for per time 202 e 2 (refer to FIG. 10B) (S 503), and this processing is ended. As described above, the winning special selection table 202e2 (see FIG. 10B) is configured such that a fixed fluctuation period fluctuation pattern is selected in accordance with the number of times of drawing the special symbol. Specifically, when the lottery for the special symbol performed first after the end of the jackpot is a win, a fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation D) having a fluctuation time of 8 seconds is selected. Also, if the second big win after the big win, the variation pattern (special variation E) with a variation time of 6 seconds is selected, and if the third big win after the big win, the variation time is 4 seconds If the fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation F) of is selected and the jackpot is the fourth after the end of the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation G) having a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected. Furthermore, when the jackpot is the fifth after the jackpot end, the fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation A) with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is selected, and when the jackpot is the sixth after the jackpot end, the fluctuation time is 1. If the variation pattern of 5 seconds (special variation H) is selected and the big hit is made 7 times after the big hit end, the variation pattern of 1 second (special variation B) is selected, and the 8th after the big hit ends In the case of a jackpot, a fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation C) having a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is selected. By configuring in this manner, the period from the end of the previous jackpot to the start of the next jackpot can be made constant regardless of the number of drawing times of the special symbol. Therefore, the presentation period of the pseudo interval presentation and the presentation period of the interval presentation performed during the big hit can be matched each time.

  On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S501: No), the display mode of out is set (S504). The specific content is the same as the setting (S404) of the display mode of the deviation of the normal variation selection process (S303). The setting may not be the same as the setting of the display mode of disconnection (S404). For example, a table different from the table for determining the stop type used in the normal variation selection process (S303) is prepared May be set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern of the deviation is determined based on the special selection table for deviation 202e1 (FIG. 10A) (S505), and the process is ended. Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. In addition, as described above, the special selection table for disconnection 202e1 (see FIG. 10A) is configured such that a fixed fluctuation period fluctuation pattern is selected according to the number of times of drawing the special symbol. Specifically, when the drawing of the special symbol performed for the first time or the second time after the end of the jackpot is out, the fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation A) having a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is selected. In addition, when the drawing of the special symbol performed for the third time or the fourth time after the end of the big hit is out, the fluctuation pattern having the fluctuation time of 1 second is selected. On the other hand, if the drawing of the special symbol performed fifth to eighth after the big hit is out of the drawing of the special symbol, a fluctuation pattern of 0.5 seconds is selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the period from the end of the previous jackpot to the end of the special variation period constant (8 seconds) regardless of the number of times of drawing the special symbol. Therefore, the presentation period of the pseudo interval presentation and the presentation period of the interval presentation performed during the big hit can be matched each time.

  Returning to FIG. 23, the description will be continued. When the process of S303 or the process of S304 is finished, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S303 or the process of S304 is set (S305). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S303 or S304 is set (S306). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S1101 of the main process (FIG. 31). Ru. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S306 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), determines whether or not the first ball entrance 64 has a winning (start winning), and there is a starting winning. It is a process for executing prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from the holding process of the value indicated by the various random number counters and the value indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S601). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S602) . Then, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (8 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  And if there is no winning on the first entrance 64 (S601: No) or if there is a winning on the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 8 If not (S603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 8 (S603: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S604). And the ball holding number command which shows the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c changed by calculation is set (S605).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 31) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c from the holding ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223 .

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S605, the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in S103 of the above-mentioned timer interrupt process is acquired (S606), and the pre-read probability change counter stored in the RAM 203 The value 203h is confirmed (S607).

  Here, when the pre-reading certainty changing counter 203h is larger than 0 (S607: Yes), whether or not the special symbol is a big hit depends on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the process of S606 and the time of high probability The determination is made by comparing one by one the 30 random values (hit values) stored in the first random number table 202a2 (not shown) of the first group (S608). As mentioned above, as a random value which becomes the big hit of the special symbol, “4, 11, 28, 38, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168 , 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 "are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the number of these rounds Is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol when the random numbers match.

  On the other hand, if the value of the pre-read certainty changing counter 203h is 0 (S607: No), whether the jackpot of the special symbol is the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the process of S406 and for low probability The first random number table 202a1 (not shown) is determined by comparing one by one with three random number values (hit values) stored in the first random number table 202a1 (not shown). As described above, three random numbers "7, 107, 282" are set as the random number values for the special symbol, and the first random number counter C1 and the random number value for these hits and the like When it matches, it determines with it being a jackpot of a special symbol.

  After determining whether the special symbol is a big hit or not by the processing of S608 or S609, the first hit type counter C2 and stop updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing and the big hit determination result determined in S608 or S609. The respective values of the type selection counter C3 are stored in the first area of the free storage areas (the first storage area to the fourth storage area) of the special symbol storage ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S610). In the process of S610, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result determined in S608 or S609 is set (S611). The winning information information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 31) described later executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prize information command, it extracts the jackpot determination result from the prize information command, and stores this information as prize information in the prize information storage area 223a to determine the special variation extension display. Use for etc.

  After the prize information command is set in the process of S611, it is determined whether the jackpot determination result determined in S608 or S609 is the jackpot of the special symbol (S612). If the jackpot determination result determined in S608 or S609 is the jackpot of the special symbol (S612: Yes), 12 is set in the pre-reading certainty changing counter 203h (S613), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, if the jackpot determination result determined in S608 or S609 is a special symbol out of place (S612: No), it is determined whether or not the pre-reading certainty changing counter 203h is greater than 0 (S614). If the counter 203 h is larger than 0 (S 614: Yes), the pre-reading certainty changing counter 203 h is decremented by 1 (S 615), and the process is ended. On the other hand, if the pre-reading certainty change counter 203h is 0 (S614: No), the process of S615 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entrance 64. It is a process for controlling the open time of the motorized part and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is in the middle of a normal symbol (second symbol) (S701). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made in the second symbol display device 83. Included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S701: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702). If the display mode 83 is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number M of holding the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S704: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S705).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the first holding area to the fourth holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S707).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / short / middle counter 203f of the RAM 203 is larger than 0 (S708). The hour-time counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time-period counter 203f is larger than 0 (S708: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is normal. It indicates that the time saving state of the symbol is displayed, and if the value of the time saving counter 203 f is 0 (S 708: No), it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is not 0 (ie, 1 or more) (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a jackpot of a special symbol (S709). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be less likely to hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (ie, in the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so the motorized prize associated with the first entrance 64 is opened. This is for the purpose of suppressing the entry of the ball intended to be won by the special winning opening 65a into the first ball entry port 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first ball entrance 64, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the first ball entrance 64 in the big hit of the special symbol, the first Many balls enter the ball entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of holding balls for the first ball inlet 64 is maximum (four times).

  In the process of S 709, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S 709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 9A).

  In the process of S708, when the value of the time-span-middle counter 203f is 0 (S708: No), the process proceeds to the process of S711. In the process of S711, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707 is low. Based on the symbol random number table for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the symbol is hit normally is acquired (S711). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 9A).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S710 or S711 is the hit of the normal symbol (S712), and when it is determined that the symbol is the normal symbol (S712: Yes) The display mode of the hit is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, it is set so that the symbol of "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (the second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is greater than 0 (S714), and when it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is greater than 0 (S714: Yes), the present is a special symbol It is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S715). As a result of determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S 715: Yes), the process proceeds to S 717. In this embodiment, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible during the jackpot of the special symbol, even when the normal symbol is hit, it is the same as when the normal symbol is detached. The number of times of opening of the motorized part and the opening time thereof are set.

  In the process of S 715, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S 715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not during the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. The opening period of the motorized accessory attached to 64 is set to one second, and the number of times of opening is set to two (S716), and the process proceeds to the processing of S719.

  In the process of S714, when the value of the time saving / middle counter 203f is 0 (S714: No), the process proceeds to the process of S717. In the process of S717, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the opening period of the motorized accessory accompanying the first ball inlet 64 is 0 While setting to 2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to 1 time (S717), and the process proceeds to the processing of S719.

  In the process of S712, when it is determined that the normal symbol is dislocated (S712: No), a display mode at the time of disengaging is set (S718). In the process of S 718, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S719.

  In the process of S719, it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 203f is greater than 0 (S719), and if the value of the time counter 203f is greater than 0 (S719: Yes), fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 The variation time of the display is set to 3 seconds (S720), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0 (S719: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short with "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and further Since the release period of the first ball entrance 64 becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first ball entrance 64.

  In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed (S722). In addition, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S720 or the processing of S721.

  In the process of S722, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S722: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S722, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S723). In the process of S723, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S713, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit It is set to be displayed. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode is set by the processing of S 718, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (displayed) on the second symbol display device 83. Are set to When the stop display is set by the processing of S723, the second symbol display updating process (see S1108) of the main process (see FIG. 31) is performed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is changed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S713 or S718.

  Then, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing is a hit of the ordinary symbol Is determined (S724). If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol hit (S 724: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the motorized role associated with the first ball entrance 64 is set (S 725), and this processing is ended. When start of the opening and closing control of the motorized part is set by the process of S725, the opening and closing control of the motorized part is performed when the motorized part opening and closing process (see S1106) of the main process (see FIG. 31) is performed Is started, and the opening and closing control of the motorized part is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S716 or the process of S717 end. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the current lottery result is the deviation of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and it is determined whether or not the passing of the ball at the normal entry hole 67 has been made. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entry port 67 (S801). Here, passage of the ball at the normal ball entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number M of holdings of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S803).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S803: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter The value (M) of 203d is incremented by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 This process is ended by storing in the area of (S805). In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first holding area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 30, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1001). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1004). If it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if not stored (S1005: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S1012 also in this case.

  If generation information of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S1012. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1115 of FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the occurrence of the power-off is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process (S1013, S1014) of the RAM, the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to step S1010.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S1005: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S1004) S1007: Yes, while holding the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the occurrence information of the power-off (S1008). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery for transmitting the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side back to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply interruption is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S1010, an effect permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Then, the interruption is permitted (S1011), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As a summary, each process of S1101 to S1108 is executed as a periodic process of 4 ms second cycle, and the counter updating process of S1111 and S1112 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the acquired ball number. Send an award ball command. The voice lamp control device also holds ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) and the start winning process (see FIG. 26), and the winning information command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 26). Send to 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the number of rounds command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32), the inter-round effect start command, the special game effect end command, and the special variation end command set in the special variation control process (see FIG. 33) are voiced It transmits to the lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then the jackpot effect is executed when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, or variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a specified number of balls. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. After closing the specific winning opening 65a in the final round, the end of the jackpot is set. The jackpot end setting includes the start of the special variation period. On the other hand, when closing the specific winning a prize opening 65a in a round other than the final round, an inter-round effect start command is set. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1104) is performed in the main process, but may be performed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, special variation control processing is performed to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that the variation pattern effect (special variation) in the special variation period has ended (S1105). In the special variation control process, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the special variation set after the end of the jackpot, and if the special variation end timing, the special variation end command is set. By setting the special fluctuation end command, the special fluctuation end display (FIG. 19 (a)) or the special fluctuation extension display (FIG. 20 (a) is triggered by the end of the special fluctuation which is finally executed in the special fluctuation period. ) Can be displayed. In the present embodiment, the special variation control process (S1105) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, a motorized product opening and closing process is performed to control the opening and closing of the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 (S1106). In the motorized part opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the motorized part is set in the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 27), the opening / closing control of the motorized part is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized prize is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S716 or the process of S717 in the normal symbol variation process end.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1107). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set in the process of S305 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is started in the first symbol display device 37 Do. In this embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from when the fluctuation is started. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, it is executed in the first symbol display device 37 when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set in the process of S305 in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) is completed. Ending the fluctuation display, the stop symbol (1st symbol) in the display mode set by the normal fluctuation selection process (S303) or the special fluctuation selection process (S304) of the special symbol fluctuation start process (refer to FIG. 23) The stop display (lighting display) is performed on the first symbol display device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1108). In the second symbol display update processing, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S720 or the processing of S721 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 27), the variation display is performed in the second symbol display device 83 Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update processing, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S723 of the normal symbol variation processing (refer to FIG. 27), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83 Ends the fluctuation display and displays the stop symbol (the second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S713 or the processing of S718 of the normal symbol fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 27). (Lights up)

  After that, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S11), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1109: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1110) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1110: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101 and the above-described processes from S1101 are repeated.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process of this time (S1110: No), during the time to the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time to the execution timing of the next main process (1) Update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1111, S1112).

  First, updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1111). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1102 (S1112).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1108 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1109, if the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S1109: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 29 has been executed, so that the process at the time of the power-off after S1113 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1113), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1114). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1115), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1116), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1109 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1101 to S1108, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1111 and S1112 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1101. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1101. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1101. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be alleviated, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, the execution of various effects according to the jackpot, the specific winning It is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large open mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1201). Specifically, the process of S213 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) is executed, and if the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, the jackpot of the special symbol is started. As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. In the process of S1201, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S1201: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S1201: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1202). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1202: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1203), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1204). After the round number command is set, this processing ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an audio lamp is displayed in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of a new round in the process of S1202 (S1202: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1205). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, a predetermined number of balls are present. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  When it is determined in the process of S1205 that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1205: No), the process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1205 that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1205: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1206), It is determined whether or not the closing of the specific winning a prize opening (large opening) 65a this time is for the final round (ie, whether or not all rounds of the jackpot have ended) (S1207).

  If it is determined that the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is for the final round (S1207: Yes), the end of the jackpot is set (S1208), and the value corresponding to the jackpot after various counters is set. It sets (S1209). That is, by setting 12 in the probability variation counter 203 e, it is set to be in the high probability state of the special symbol from the end of the big hit until the drawing of the special symbol is performed 12 times. In addition, by setting 8 in the hour-time counter 203f, it is set to be a high probability state (time-shortened state) of the normal symbol from the end of the big hit until the lottery of the special symbol is performed eight times. Furthermore, by setting 8 to the special variation in progress counter 203g, it is set to be a special variation period from the end of the jackpot until the drawing of the special symbol is performed eight times. After the setting of the various counter values, this processing ends.

  When it is determined that the round in which the specific winning a prize opening (large opening) 65a is closed is not the final round (S1207: No), an inter-round presentation start command is set (S1210), and this processing is ended. The inter-round presentation start command is a command for starting an interval presentation (inter-round presentation) which is executed in 10 seconds from the end of the jackpot round to the start of the next round.

  The inter-round effect command set by the process of S1210 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the inter-round effect command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits the inter-round effect command for display to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives a display round-to-round effect command, the third symbol display device 81 starts interval effect (inter-round effect).

  Next, the special variation control process (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the special variation control process (S1105). This special variation control process (S1105) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and determines the end timing of the variation pattern effect (special variation) in the special variation period set after the end of the jackpot. This is processing for starting a special variation end display (FIG. 19A) or a special variation extension display (FIG. 20A) which is an effect at the end of the special variation period.

  First, in the special variation control process, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the special variation (S1301). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 selected in the special variation selection process (S304) has elapsed (S1301). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (in response to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time of this special fluctuation is If it has elapsed (S1301: Yes), a special variation end command is set (S1302), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special fluctuation has not elapsed (that is, it is not the special fluctuation period or the special fluctuation end timing in the special fluctuation period) (S1301: No), the processing of S1302 is skipped. , End this process.

  The special variation end command set in the process of S1302 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special variation end command, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether the special variation period has ended, and when it is determined that the special variation period has ended, the display control device displays the special variation end command for display. Send to 114. When the display special variation end command is received by the display control device 114, the special variation end indication (FIG. 19 (a)) or the special variation extension indication (figure at the time of the special variation end in the third symbol display device 81) 20 (a) is started. Here, in the display special variation end command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, a special variation end display (FIG. 19 (a)) or a special variation extension display (FIG. 20 (a)). It contains information indicating which to display.

  In the present embodiment, in the special variation control process (S1105), a special variation end command is output each time the variation pattern effect (special variation) to be executed in the special variation period after the end of the jackpot is completed. The special variation end command may be set only at the end timing of the last variation pattern effect of the variation period. As a result, the process of outputting the special variation end command at the end of the special variation other than the special variation last executed in the special variation period can be omitted, so that the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced.

<About control processing of voice lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 39, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 34, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1401). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1516 (see FIG. 35) is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “temporary power failure”). It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S1402). As described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1513 in FIG. 35), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S1516. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process of S1516 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1402: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1516 It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1406. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to S1404 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. From the above, it is judged that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1516 after an instantaneous power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. In the case where it is started to start, since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: No), and the process proceeds to S1408.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1402: Yes), the current start-up process is after an instantaneous power failure and during the execution of the power-off process of S1517, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in this case, the process proceeds to S1404 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1404, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1406). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1407), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1408, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1516 is executed (see S1515 in FIG. 35). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1516 is executed, the process of S1408 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1516 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1409), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410). The permission is set (S1411), and the process shifts to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1408 when the power-off flag is off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, and the processing of S1404 through S1406 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: No), S1409, which is a process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1410, and an initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410). Then (S1411), it shifts to the main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1409 is that, when the process of S1408 is reached via the processes of S1404 to S1406, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1404. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the previous processing of S1501 has been executed (S1501), and 1 ms or more has elapsed If not (S1501: No), the processing proceeds to S1511 without performing the processing of S1502 to S1510. In the process of S1501, the process of determining whether or not 1 ms has elapsed is mainly a process relating to display (rendering) in S1502 to S1510, and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1511 and the variable display setting process of S1512 in a short cycle. Since the process of S1511 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent reception omission of the command transmitted from main controller 110, and by executing the process of S1512 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1503 to S1512 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1502) ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to become the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1508 described later (S1503), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1504). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1505 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1505, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting a hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S1507). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the variable effect is not executed or during a high speed change period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and a rear surface image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during reach production produces a sense of expectation for the jackpot. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be set as a decision button for selecting one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. When the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1507 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1508), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1509). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1509, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1510), and the process shifts to the process of S1511. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1508 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S1509 is also executed in time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1511, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 (S1511). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1512). In the fluctuation display setting process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute fluctuation presentation, a fluctuation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1512 ends, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1513). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1513 (S1513: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1515), and the power-off process is executed (S1516). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1517), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the occurrence information of the power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1513 (S1513: No), it is determined based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1514) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1514: No), the process returns to S1501, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1514: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a command determination process (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1511). This command determination process (S1511) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S1511), first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern is detected from the main control apparatus 110. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1601). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the display fluctuation pattern command setting process for extracting and setting the fluctuation pattern type from the fluctuation pattern command is executed (S1602), and the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the display variation pattern command setting process (S1602) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the display variation pattern command setting process (S1602).

  In the display variation pattern command setting process (S1602), first, the variation start flag 223c of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1701). Thereafter, the fluctuation pattern is acquired from the received command (S1702), and it is determined whether the acquired fluctuation pattern is a special fluctuation (S1703). When it is determined that the acquired fluctuation pattern is not a special fluctuation (S1703: No), the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the fluctuation pattern table 222a of the ROM 222 (S1704). On the other hand, if the acquired fluctuation pattern is special fluctuation (S1703: Yes), the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the special fluctuation pattern table 222b of the ROM 222 (S1705). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 39) described later is executed. And it is used in order to set the fluctuation pattern command for indication which notifies the start of fluctuation production and the fluctuation pattern classification to display control 114.

  Returning to FIG. 36, the description will be continued. If the variation pattern command has not been received (S1601: No), it is next determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1603). When the stop type command is received (S1603: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1604), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1605). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 39) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1603: No), it is next determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1606). And when the holding ball number command is received (S1606: Yes), the value included in the received holding ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol The number of holdings N) of the variable display in is extracted, and this is stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1607). Further, in the process of S1607, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1607 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the number of holding balls command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball wins at the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) or when the drawing of the special symbol is performed, the starting winning combination is performed. Every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 by the process of S1607 is the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc. At the time of lottery of symbols, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1607 is executed, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1606, if the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S1606: No), it is next determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1608). When the prize information command is received (S1608: Yes), the jackpot determination result for the special symbol is extracted as prize information from the received command, and is stored in the first area of the prize information storage area 223a (S1609). Return to processing. In the process of S1609, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins to the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), the value of each counter C1 is acquired in the main control unit 110, and the acquired counter C1 and the prefetch error are changed The lottery of the jackpot of the special symbol is made by the value of the middle counter 203h, and the jackpot determination result is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. If the pre-read probability change counter 203h is larger than 0, the lottery of the special symbol is performed based on the special symbol big-hit random number table for high probability time, and if the pre-read probability change counter 203h is 0, the special symbol for low probability time The lottery of the special symbol jackpot is performed based on the jackpot random number table. Then, when the pre-reading ends in the main control unit 110, a winning information information command including the jackpot determination result obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113. In addition, the jackpot determination result of the special symbol obtained by the pre-reading may be a prediction, and may be provided separately from the jackpot lottery of the original special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the winning information command has not been received in the process of S1608 (S1608: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1610). Then, when the round number command is received (S1610: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1611), and the display round number command according to the extracted round number is set ( S1612), the process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, if the round number command has not been received in the process of S1610 (S1610: No), it is then determined whether an inter-round effect start command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1613). Then, when the inter-round effect start command is received (S1613: Yes), the inter-round effect start command for display is displayed to display the interval effect (inter-round effect) on the third symbol display device 81 ( S1614), the process ends. The inter-round presentation start command for display set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. Are sent to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the inter-round presentation start command, the third symbol display device 81 starts interval presentation (inter-round presentation).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1613, when the inter-round effect start command has not been received (S1613: No), it is determined whether the special game effect end command has been received (S1615). Then, when the special game effect end command is received (S 1615: Yes), the third symbol display device 81 sets a display special game effect end command for starting the pseudo interval effect (S 1616). End the process. The display special game effect end command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. Are sent to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display special game effect end command, the third symbol display device 81 starts pseudo interval effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1615, when the special game effect end command is not received (S1615: No), it is determined whether the special variation end command is received (S1617). When it is determined that the special variation end command has been received (S1617: Yes), the display special variation end command setting process is executed (S1618), and this process ends.

  Here, the display special variation end command setting process (S1618) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the display special variation end command setting process (S1618). The display special variation end command process is a process for setting a display special variation end command for causing the display control device 114 to execute the termination effect of the pseudo interval effect based on the end of the special variation period. is there.

  In the display special variation end command setting process (S1618), first, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the special variation period (S1801). Specifically, it is determined whether the special fluctuation period has ended by whether the special fluctuation has been performed a predetermined number of times (eight times in the present embodiment). The number of executions of the special variation may be included in the special variation end command and received from the main control unit 110, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the jackpot. It may be

  In the process of S1801, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the special variation period (S1801: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the special variation period (S1801: Yes), winning information of the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223 is obtained (S1802) It is determined whether there is winning information to be shown (S1803).

  If it is determined in the process of S1803 that there is winning information indicating a big hit (S1803: Yes), the special variation extension display (FIG. 20A) is set as the display mode of the special variation end (S1804), Transfer to the processing of S1806. The special variation extension display set here is based on the winning information acquired in the process of S1802, and the special variation extension display is ended in accordance with the predetermined stop display which is the big hit. Specifically, when the winning information in the first, second and fourth areas is off and the winning information in the third area is big hit, for example, the variation time of the gap is 10 seconds and the variation time of the big hit is 15 seconds. In this way, the variation time is uniquely determined according to the jackpot determination result, and the special variation extension display may be ended in 35 seconds when the predetermined stop display which is the jackpot is displayed, or the jackpot is The special variation extension indication may be kept displayed until the variation pattern command for displaying the predetermined stop indication is received.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1803 that there is no winning information indicating a big hit (S1803: No), the special variation end display (FIG. 19A) is set as the special variation end display mode (S1805) ), Shift to the processing of S1806. The special variation end display is a fixed effect for 2 seconds, and as shown in FIG. 19 (a), after a boy can not open the door and a crying effect is performed, as shown in FIG. As shown in b), a woman appears on the third symbol display device 81, and an effect is displayed in which the character "Meta!" is displayed. Since the period until the pseudo interval effect is finished can be made 10 seconds (8 seconds of special variation period + 2 seconds of special variation end display) by setting the special variation end indication as the effect for 2 seconds, it is a big hit It can be combined with the production period of interval production.

  In addition, the special variation end display is not necessarily limited to the effect of 2 seconds, and based on the winning information acquired in the process of S1802, the fourth variation display corresponding to the first to fourth areas is finally stopped and displayed. The special variation end display may be ended according to the stop display of the area. Specifically, when winning information in the first to fourth areas is out, for example, the outlier fluctuation time is configured to be uniquely determined according to the jackpot determination result, such as 10 seconds. Finally, the special variation end indication may end in 40 seconds when the stop indication is displayed, or until the variation pattern command for displaying the stop indication last, that is, the variation pattern command after four times is received The special variation end display may be kept displayed.

  In the process of S1806, the display mode of the special variation end set in the process of S1804 or the process of S1805 is set as a display special variation end command (S1806), and this process is ended and the command determination process (see FIG. 36). Return to). The display special variation end command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. , And sent to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display special variation end command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the special variation end display (FIG. 19 (a)) or the special variation extension display (FIG. 20 (a)).

  Returning to FIG. 36, the description will be continued. In the process of S1617, when the special variation end start command has not been received (S1617: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed ( S1619) Return to the main processing. If the other command is a command used in the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed control device 114 The command is set to be sent to the Specific examples of the other commands include, for example, the opening start command described above. In the process of S1619, information is extracted whether or not the jackpot during the special variation period is extracted from the opening start command, and a command to transmit a display opening start command corresponding to the extracted information to the display control device 114 Make settings for

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the variation display setting process (S1512) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S1512). This variation display setting process (S1512) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation presentation, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1901). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, off) (S1901: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S1906. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1901: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1902), and then the display fluctuation pattern command setting process of the command determination process (see FIG. 35) In (S1602), the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1903).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1904). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1905). In the process of S1905, data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1906.

  In the process of S1906, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1906). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S1906: No), since the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, this fluctuation display End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1907), and then in the process of S1605 of the command determination process (see FIG. 36) The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1908).

  Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1909), and the process shifts to the processing of S1910.

  In the process of S1909, a stop type command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1910). , End this process. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 53. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, data of one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read out from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S2101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2102). Thus, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S2102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2102, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2103). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot process (see S2001 of FIG. 40). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 40) (S2105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process is finished.

  As described above, when the boot process (S2001) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 41, the control program of the predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S2102. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S2101. The processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed after the processing is repeated a plurality of times including the processing of S2102.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2103 to S2105 without performing the processes of S2101 and S2102. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. When the boot process is finished, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a at power on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2003, next, the power on change image is generated. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2004, the simple image display flag 233c is then performed. (S2005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 51A) described later. The resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed so as to transfer (see S3602 in FIG. 51A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, a simple command determination process is performed so that a simple power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B). The simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 42B) is executed (see S2308 in FIG. 42B).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first ball entrance 64, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110 When it is through the device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, a simple power-on variation image can be displayed immediately during the variation presentation period, and a simple variation presentation can be performed. . Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2005, the interrupt permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42A, the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 42 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 42 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interruption process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified and then the drawing of the image By creating a list (see FIG. 17) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 42B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so it is not a simple power-on image but a normal effect image. In order to cause the symbol display device 81 to display, the command determination process (S2302) is executed, and then the display setting process (S2303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 43 to 47.

  In the display setting process (S2303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302), etc., an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S2304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2303) or the simple display setting processing (S2309) While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. Also when a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, the back image after the change is sent to the image controller 237 even when the back image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction to transfer the image data of the character data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is set. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2306). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S2304), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2305) The drawing list shown in FIG. 17 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by processing of S2307, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (large jack A, big jack B, big jack C, big jack D, display at the time of other detachment) indicated by the display stop kind command is displayed. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display a simple power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S2308) is performed, and then a simple display setting process (S2309) is performed, and the process proceeds to S2304. Do.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 47, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2302) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 43, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2401: No), The command determination processing ends and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S2403).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. Then (S2405), the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S2405) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 (a) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 44A), first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation rendering pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is stored in the data table storage area. It reads from 233b and sets to the display data table buffer 233d (S2501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2501 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table judgment flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the process of S2501 is turned on, and other fluctuation The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2503). In the display setting process, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d easily corresponds to which fluctuation pattern by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S 2503. It can be judged.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2504) 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 2505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2506), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized in the process of S2505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2501. , And at the same time the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2502. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2504, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2406), If there is a display variation type command (S2406: Yes), a stop type command processing is executed (S2407), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D, other display at the time of disconnection) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S2601) The fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by comparing the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 42 (b)) is executed. The stop symbol after the effect is finally set (S2602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S2603), and ends this type-of-stop command processing, and returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 43).

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is described. In the above-described task processing (S2304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2603 and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Returning to FIG. 43, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2406 that there is no display stop type command (S2406: No), it is then determined whether there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2408), If there is a display round number command (S2408: Yes), the round number command processing is executed (S2409), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 (a) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The table buffer 233 d is set (S 2701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e (S 2702).

  Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2704). Then, the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are both set to OFF (S2705), and the round number command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2408 that there is no display round number command (S2408: No), it is then determined whether or not there is an inter-display round presentation start command among the unprocessed commands (S2410) ), If there is an inter-round presentation start command for display (S2410: Yes), an inter-round presentation start command process is executed (S2411), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

  Here, the details of the inter-round effect start command process (S2411) will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (b). FIG. 45 (b) is a flowchart showing inter-round effect start command processing. This inter-round effect start command process is a process for displaying an interval effect (inter-round effect) in the third symbol display device 81 based on the inter-round effect start command received from the audio lamp control device 114 .

  In the inter-round presentation start command processing, first, the inter-round display data table corresponding to the display mode of the interval presentation (inter-round presentation) indicated by the display inter-round presentation start command is determined, and the determined inter-round display data table Are read out from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each of the inter-round display data tables corresponding to the display mode of each inter-round effect, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the inter-round display data table set by the process of S2801 is turned on. At the same time, the data table determination flag corresponding to the other inter-round display data table is set to OFF (S2803). In the display setting process, the inter-round display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to the display mode of which inter-round effect by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2803. It can be easily determined if there is any.

  Next, based on the inter-round display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2801, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2804), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2805). Then, the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are both set to OFF (S2806), and the inter-round presentation start command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2410 that there is no inter-round presentation start command for display (S2410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display special game presentation end command among the unprocessed commands. (S2412) If there is a display special game effect end command (S2412: Yes), a special game effect end command process is executed (S2413), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 46 (a), the details of the special game effect end command process (S2413) will be described. FIG. 46 (a) is a flowchart showing special game effect end command processing. The special game effect end command process is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display a pseudo interval effect based on the display special game effect end command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the special game effect end command processing, first, the special game effect end display data table corresponding to the display mode of the special variation to be executed at the end of the special game effect indicated by the display special game effect end command is determined, and the determined special A game effect end display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2901). Next, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2902). And among the data table discrimination flags provided for each of the special game effect end data tables corresponding to the display mode of the special variation to be executed at the end of each special game effect, the special game effect end display data table set by the processing of S2901 The data table determination flag corresponding to is turned on, and the data table determination flag corresponding to the other special game effect completion display data table is set to off (S2903). In the display setting process, the special game effect termination display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is referred to which special game effect termination effect display mode by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2903. It can be easily determined whether it corresponds.

  Next, based on the special game effect end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2904), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2905). Then, the demonstration display flag and the determination display flag are both set to OFF (S2906), the special game effect end command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2412 that there is no display special game effect end command (S2412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display special variation end command among the unprocessed commands ( S2414) If there is a display special variation end command (S2414: Yes), the special variation end command processing is executed (S2415), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the special variation end command process (S2415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 (b) is a flowchart showing the special variation end command process. This special fluctuation end command processing corresponds to the special fluctuation end display (FIG. 19 (a)) or the special fluctuation extension display (FIG. 20 (a)) corresponding to the display special fluctuation end command received from the audio lamp control device 114. It is a process for displaying when the special variation ends.

  In the special variation end command processing, first, the special variation end display data table corresponding to the display mode of the special variation end display or the extension display to be executed at the special variation end indicated by the display special variation end command is determined. The determined special variation end display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3001). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each of the special variation end data tables corresponding to the display mode of the end indication or the extension indication of each special variation end, the special game effect end indication data table set by the processing of S3001 The corresponding data table determination flag is turned on, and the data table determination flag corresponding to the other special game effect end display data table is set to off (S3003). In the display setting process, the special game effect end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is referred to which special game effect end effect is displayed by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S3003. It can be easily determined whether it corresponds.

  Next, based on the special game effect end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3001, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3004), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3005). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S3006), the special variation end command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2414 that there is no display special variation end command (S2414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2416), If there is a rear surface image change command (S2416: Yes), the rear surface image change command processing is executed (S2417), and the processing returns to S2401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 47A, the details of the rear image change command processing (S2417) will be described. FIG. 47A is a flowchart of the rear image change command process. The rear surface image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear surface image change command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3603) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command in the on state is set to on (S3101) . Then, among the back surface image determination flags provided for each of the back surface image types (back surfaces A to C), the back surface image determination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on The rear image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S3102), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52), when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S3101 is turned on, the back surface after change is changed from the back image determination flag set in the process of S3102. Identify the image type. Then, if the identified back image type is the back surface B or back surface C, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 Since the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, the transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set.

  In addition, in the task processing, when it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed by the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S3102 The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, and further, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored For the video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3102, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2416 that there is no rear image change command (S2416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2418). For example (S2418: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2419), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2419) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. The error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing (see FIG. 47B), first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S3201). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S3202). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3201, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S3202, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S3202, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2418 that there is no error command (S2418: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2420), and the process returns to S2201. In addition, as processing (S2420) for other unprocessed commands, for example, processing when receiving the above-mentioned display opening start command may be mentioned. Specifically, if it is determined that the display opening start command has been received in the process of S2420, if it is a jackpot of the normal fluctuation period, a mode of a usual opening (for example, congratulations that a jackpot has been newly won) A process of displaying the opening effect in the mode) and displaying the opening effect in a mode (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 19 (b)) as if the big hit continues if it is a big hit during the special variation period It is.

  In the process of S2201 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes ), The processing of S2402 to S2420 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2402 to S2420 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of S2401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (S2309) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simplified command determination process, from the unprocessed command stored in the command buffer area, a command necessary to display a simple power-on image, that is, a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command Is extracted and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 44 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 44 (b)), which are processing corresponding to the respective commands, are executed, and the other commands are Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (refer to FIG. 44A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image necessary for the setting are stored in the power-on main motion image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233b, and a process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 48, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3301), and if the new command flag is not on, ie, off (S3301: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the process of S3302 to S3304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process to be executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag to off (S3302), S3303 to S3304. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S3303, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3304).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag is developed (S3401).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, it is necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle Determine various parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3304), or when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off in the process of S3303 (S3303: No), the process proceeds to S3305.

  At S3305, pointer update processing is executed (S3305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S 3501). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233 f is updated by the process of S 3501, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233 f after the update is End information (S3502). As a result, if it is the End information (S3502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is a demonstration display data table (S 3503), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S 3503: Yes), display data The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233 d is set in the clock counter 233 h (S 3504), the pointer 233 f is set to 1 for initialization (S 3505), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3506), the present process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S3502: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S3306 together with the warning image etc. expanded in advance, and the display coordinate position for each sprite Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as zoom ratio and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3307), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S3308). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is larger than 0 (S3308: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3308: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (S3309).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S3309: Yes), the finalized display is not yet performed, and it is the timing to perform the finalized display, so first, the finalized display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3310), and then the contents are cleared by writing the null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3311). Then, time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3313). Then, after setting the decision display flag indicating that the decision display effect is on in the on state (S3314), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are copied as they are to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3315) Return to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. Further, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S2304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S3315, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the finalized display flag is not on but off in the process of S3309 (S3309: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S3316). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S3316: Yes), this means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so the demonstration display data table is displayed data table The contents are set in the buffer 233 d (S 3317), and then the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (S 3318). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3320), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration effect is being performed in the on state is set on (S3321), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the finalized display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can set the drawing contents.

  In the process of S3316, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3316: No), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended And return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simplified display setting process (S2309) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 42B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, a simple power fluctuation image according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power fluctuation image is finished. A process of setting a display data table that specifies to stop and display the image of the above image in the display data table buffer 233 d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2305) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 51A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3601: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3602) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51 (b).

  On the other hand, if the result of the process of S3601 is that the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3601: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51B, the resident image transfer setting process (S3602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 51B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3602).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S3701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3701: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S 3702). In the process of S3702, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer completion signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, if it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S3702 (S3702: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3702: Yes), the process proceeds to S3703. Further, as a result of the process of S3701, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3701: No), the process proceeds to S3703.

  In the process of S3703, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3703: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3704), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of S3703, if all resident target image data have been transferred (S3703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3705), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 42B) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 42B). Since determination processing (see FIGS. 43 to 47) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 48 to 50) are performed, drawing of an image at normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed on the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) (see S3601: No in FIG. 51A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a normal image transfer setting process (S3603) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3603).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3305) of the display setting process (S2303) executed earlier is used. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3801). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S3802), and if it is transfer data information (S3802: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3803, the transfer start flag is set in the work RAM 233. The transfer start flag indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the on state, and the process proceeds to step S3805.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S3802 (S3802: No), the process of S3803 and S3804 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3805. In the process of S3805, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the last transfer of the image data is completed (S3805), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S3805: Yes), it is further determined based on the transfer instruction whether transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S3806).

  In the process of S3806, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S3806 (S3806: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3806: Yes), the process proceeds to S3807. Further, as a result of the processing of S3805, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3805: No), the processing proceeds to S3807.

  In the process of S3807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3807), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3807: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag Is turned off (S3808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3803 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3807: No), it is then determined whether the rear image change flag is on (S3809). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S3809: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S3810), the back image provided for each back image type Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3811). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3812), and the process proceeds to S3813.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S 3813, if the back image determination flag in the on state is of the back A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

  In the process of S3813, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3813). The determination in the process of S 3813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233 i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S 3813 (S 3813: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3813 (S3813: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3814). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3814, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3815), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233i sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, when the change of the back image is performed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier by executing the normal-use image transfer process, the back image The image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the above can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2306) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) The drawing list shown in FIG. 17 is generated from the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305) (S3901). That is, in the process of S3901, based on the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type storing the image data of the sprite and the address are specified. The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing object buffer information specified by the drawing object buffer flag 233 j are transmitted to the image controller (S 3902). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 1 including the information for expanding the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236 b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. Can.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3902, the drawing object buffer flag 233j is updated (S3903). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is performed by inverting the value, that is, setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 42B) is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is configured to perform pseudo-interval effect after the end of the jackpot. This pseudo-interval effect is started during the special fluctuation period (from the end of the jackpot until the end of the eight fluctuation pattern effects, or from the end of the jackpot until the lottery for the special symbol is performed 8 times) And the same effect as the interval effect performed during each round of the jackpot.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the player wins the jackpot by the time the lottery for the special symbol is performed eight times after the jackpot is completed, the jackpot will be the jackpot at any of the first to eighth times The period from the end of the jackpot to the start of the first round of the next jackpot is configured to be 10 seconds. In this 10 seconds, the pseudo-interval effect is executed, and it is indicated that the jackpot will continue. On the other hand, the interval production performed during the jackpot is also fixed to 10 seconds, and it is indicated that the jackpot continues and the next round starts in the production for 10 seconds. That is, the pseudo interval effect and the interval effect during the big hit are configured such that the effect period and the effect content are the same. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the interval effect and the pseudo interval effect. Therefore, if the player indicates that the continuation of the jackpot is suggested by the director, the jackpot will end once whether the jackpot is won with a large number of rounds. As a result of winning the jackpot again by the time the lottery of the special symbol is performed eight times, it becomes difficult to distinguish whether the jackpot has continued for a long time. Therefore, since it is possible to determine how long the jackpot round will last, it is possible to play the game while having a sense of expectation for the jackpot lasting for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game during the jackpot of the player.

  In addition, with the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, pre-reading is performed at the end of the special fluctuation period, and it is determined whether or not there is a lottery result that will be a big hit in the four special symbol lotterys from the end of the special fluctuation. ing. Then, when it is determined that the lottery result to be the jackpot is held, the pseudo-interval effect is extended to the jackpot. As a result, the pseudo interval period is extended to the player even if an effect that suggests the end of the jackpot in the pseudo interval effect (that is, an effect shown in FIG. 19 (a) that the boy starts crying) is displayed. Can be expected. Thus, the player's interest in playing can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the special variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 9C) is configured so that the special variation period is always 8 seconds, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, if the special variation period is 10 seconds, and if the special variation is to be a big hit during the special variation, by omitting the opening period, the period from the end of the big hit to the start of the first round of the next big hit is 10 It may be seconds.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in order to match the execution period of the interval effect and the execution period of the pseudo interval effect, the variation pattern effect of the variation time determined according to the value of the special variation in progress counter 203g is executed. Although configured as described above, the control method for causing the execution period of the pseudo interval effect to coincide with the execution period of the interval effect is not limited to this. For example, a timer capable of measuring the time elapsed since the end of the jackpot may be provided, and the variation period may be set based on the elapsed time when selecting the aspect of the variation pattern effect. Specifically, for example, when the aspect of the fluctuation pattern is selected with 5 seconds of the special fluctuation period remaining, fluctuation time of 5 seconds or less (for example, 1 second, 2 seconds, etc.) or fluctuation of 5 seconds It may be configured to select one of the times.

  Further, the period of the interval effect and the period of the pseudo interval effect are not limited to 10 seconds, and can be arbitrarily determined, for example, 5 seconds or 15 seconds. Further, the interval presentation period during the jackpot may be randomly set each time. As a result, since it is not necessary to set the effect period of the pseudo interval effect as the fixed period, it is possible to make the table for selecting the change pattern effect during the special change period common with, for example, the normal time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the special variation period ends (eight seconds from the end of the big hit) and the timing at which the variation of the special symbol ends are matched, but the timing does not necessarily have to be matched. For example, the special variation period may be set as a fixed period (for example, 8 seconds), and the variation pattern effect may be selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d regardless of the fixed period (for example, 8 seconds). That is, the special variation period may be ended when a fixed period (for example, 8 seconds) elapses even during the variation pattern effect. With such a configuration, the data table for selecting the variation pattern effect mode can be used in common with the normal time, so the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced. Further, by setting the special variation period as the fixed period (for example, 8 seconds), it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the interval effect during the big hit and the pseudo interval effect. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to know how long the jackpot will last, and to allow the player to have an expectation for the jackpot to continue for a long time. In this case, if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big win during the special fluctuation period, and the production period of the fluctuation pattern effect for informing the jackpot exceeds the special fluctuation period, until the big win You may comprise so that pseudo | simulation interval presentation may be extended. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the jackpot has ended once, so that the jackpot can be felt as if the jackpot has continued for a long time. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a big hit does not occur in the special variation period, the variation pattern effect mode is selected from the out-of-time special selection table 202e1 (see FIG. 10A), and the special variation period is selected. In the case of a jackpot, the variation pattern presentation mode is selected from the hit special selection table 202e2 (see FIG. 10B), but the variation pattern mode is selected from the common table. It may be configured to For example, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, it may be configured to select the mode of the variation pattern effect from the special selection table for disconnection 202e1 (see FIG. 10A). With this configuration, the hit special selection table 202e2 can be omitted, so the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced. In addition, the special selection table for disconnection 202e1 is configured such that a fluctuation pattern effect with a shorter fluctuation period is selected as the number of drawing times of the special symbol increases. As a result, since a relatively long fluctuation pattern effect is executed in the first 4 seconds of the special fluctuation period, the drawing of the special symbol is performed only twice, while in the second 4 seconds, the fluctuation is relatively short. Since the pattern effect is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed six times. That is, since the number of lottery times of special symbols increases in the second half of the special fluctuation period, if it is a big hit during the special fluctuation period, it tends to be a big hit in the second half of the special fluctuation period. Therefore, even in the special variation period, even if the mode of variation pattern effects is selected from the special selection table 202e1 for out-of-time (refer to FIG. 10A) regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, the win during the special variation period If so, it is possible to increase the possibility of being hit in the second half of the special variation period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the pseudo-interval effect is produced from the length of the special variation period even in the case of winning.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, as a result of the pre-reading performed at the end of the special variation period, when it becomes a big hit by the time the lottery of four special symbols is performed, it is configured to extend the pseudo interval effect. Even when there is no holding ball that will be a big hit at the end of the special variation period, the pseudo-interval effect may be extended with a predetermined probability. As a result, it is not determined that the jackpot will be a big hit after the end of the pseudo interval effect only by the extension of the pseudo interval effect, so the player can see the result of the pseudo interval effect after the extension to the end.

Second Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 to 60, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the variation pattern effect of the fixed variation period is selected for each drawing number of the special symbol in the special variation period. Thus, the special fluctuation period is configured to end within 8 seconds from the end of the jackpot regardless of whether or not the special fluctuation period is a big hit. In other words, in the first embodiment, it is premised that the fluctuation pattern effect is executed without intervals.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the main control unit 110 causes the voice lamp control unit 113 to generate pseudo-interval effects when a predetermined time (eight seconds) has elapsed even during the special variation period. It is configured to notify that it is the end timing of. That is, even in the special fluctuation period, even if the start condition is not satisfied and the number of holding balls becomes zero (no fluctuation state), the execution period of the pseudo interval effect can be made to coincide with the interval effect. It is configured as follows. As a result, although eight fluctuation pattern effects are not executed, it is possible to suppress the pseudo interval effect from continuing indefinitely.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in the special fluctuation period, when the state of fluctuation does not occur and it is detected that the player has stopped the game, the predetermined time (eight seconds) has not elapsed. However, the main controller 110 is configured to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of the end of the pseudo interval effect. This allows the player to recognize that there is no possibility of becoming a big hit unless the ball next wins to the first ball entrance 64, before the end of the special variation period. Thus, for example, the player can not launch the game ball to the player who has stopped the game, for example, to concentrate on the effect of whether or not the jackpot continues, so the game is stopped. The state can be shortened.

  In addition, if the jackpot continues for a long time, the player may lose money if the game during the jackpot is not continued without taking a break. When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are prized in the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. Even if it is not, the special winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed, and the opportunity to obtain the winning ball is missed. In the present embodiment, the player can easily take a break because he can know earlier a state in which there is no possibility of becoming a big hit unless the player strikes a ball. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to execute a well-defined game.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration in that the configuration of the RAM 203 is changed in the main control unit 110, and the timer executed by the MPU 201 The partial process included in the interrupt process (see FIG. 21) is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the partial process included in the main process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 is This point is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The other configurations, other processes executed by the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are described in the first embodiment. Are identical to the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment
First, with reference to FIG. 54, the RAM 203 built in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 54, in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment is provided with a clock counter 203 j, a stop period counter 203 k, and a special fluctuation flag 203 l. .

  The clock counter 203 j is a down counter used to determine whether 8 seconds have passed since the end of the big hit. In the big hit control process 2, a counter value corresponding to 8 seconds is set in the big hit control process 2 (see S1221 in FIG. 59), and the main process (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment is executed. Every time the special fluctuation control process 2 is performed, one is decremented (see S1311 in FIG. 60).

  The stop period counter 203k is a down counter that determines the length of the period during which the player has stopped playing the game during the special change period set after the big hit ends. Based on the value of the stop period counter 203k, it is determined whether to end the pseudo interval effect earlier than usual. In the stop period counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set at the end of the big hit in the big hit control processing 2 (see S1221 in FIG. 59). Also, in the special fluctuation period, also when the operation of the handle 51 by the player is detected (that is, when it is determined that the touch sensor 51a is turned on), the counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is reset. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not moving during the special fluctuation period, the holding ball is in the state of 0, and the player does not operate the handle 51, the timer division in the second embodiment is divided. Every time the loading process (see FIG. 55) is executed, one is subtracted from the period shortening process (see S4004 in FIG. 57).

  The special fluctuation in progress flag 203l is a flag indicating whether or not the special fluctuation period is in progress, and indicates that the special fluctuation period is in progress if the state is ON, and the normal state (that is, the special After the end of the fluctuation period). The special variation in progress flag 203l is set to ON at the end of the jackpot (see S1222 in FIG. 59). On the other hand, when the special variation end command to be output from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 is set, the special variation in progress flag 203l is set to off (see S4007 in FIG. 57 and S1313 in FIG. 60). In addition, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, it is set off before the jackpot is started (see S232 in FIG. 56).

<About control processing of main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 54 to 60. First, FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. As described above, this timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed every two milliseconds.

  Among the timer interrupt processes, the processes of S101 to S103 and S105 to S109 are respectively the same as the processes of S101 to S103 and S105 to S109 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) in the first embodiment. Processing is performed. And in timer interruption processing in a 2nd embodiment, it replaces with special symbol variation processing (S104) in a 1st embodiment, and special symbol variation processing 2 (S111) is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the above-mentioned special symbol variation process 2 (S111) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 2 (S111). Similar to the special symbol variation processing (S104) in the first embodiment, this special symbol variation processing 2 (S111) is a variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol and the like performed in the display device 81.

Among the special symbol variation processing 2 (S111), in each processing of S201 to S220, the same processing as the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment is executed.
And, in the special symbol fluctuation processing 2 in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is 0 in the processing of S204 (S204: No), then, the period shortening processing Is executed (S231), and the present process ends. The period shortening process (S231) is a process for shortening and ending the pseudo-interval effect according to the operation situation of the steering wheel 51 in the special variation period.

  Furthermore, in the special symbol variation process 2 in the second embodiment, when the start of the jackpot is set by the process of S213, then the special variation in progress flag 203l is set to OFF (S232), and the process proceeds to S220. By temporarily turning off the special variation in progress flag 203l before the jackpot is started, it is possible to suppress the effect or control being erroneously executed during the special variation period in the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the period shortening process performed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 56) will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this period shortening process. As described above, the period shortening process is a process for shortening and terminating the pseudo-interval effect according to the operation situation of the steering wheel 51 in the special variation period.

  In the period shortening process, first, it is determined whether or not it is within 8 seconds after the end of the big hit by determining whether the value of the time counter 203 j is larger than 0 (S 4001). When it is determined that the value of the clock counter 203 j is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S 4001: No), it is after notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the pseudo interval effect has ended. Because this means that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4001 that the value of the time counter 203j is larger than 0, then it is determined whether or not the player is operating the handle 51 based on the detection result of the touch sensor 51a ( S4002). When it is determined in the process of S4002 that the player is operating the handle 51 (S4002: Yes), a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set to the value of the stop period counter 203k (S4003), and the main process is performed. Finish. The stop period counter 203k is decremented by one every 2 ms, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 55). Thus, the counter value corresponding to 2 seconds (ie, 2000 ms) is 1000.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4002 that the player has not operated the handle 51 (S4002: No), the value of the stop period counter 203k is decremented by 1 (S4004). It is determined whether the value is 0 (S4005). Then, if it is determined that the value of the stop period counter 203k is not 0 (that is, it is a value of 1 or more) (S4005: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4005 that the value of the stop period counter is 0 (S4005: Yes), the player does not operate the handle 51 for 2 seconds (ie, the player does not Since it means that the ball has not been hit for 2 seconds, a special variation end command is set (S4006) to set the special variation end command in order to shorten the pseudo-interval effect and end (S4007). ), End this processing.

  By shortening the pseudo-interval effect and ending it, the player recognizes that there is no possibility of a big hit unless the ball next wins to the first entrance 64, before the end of the special variation period. It can be done. Thus, for example, the player can not launch the game ball to the player who has stopped the game, for example, to concentrate on the effect of whether or not the jackpot continues, so the game is stopped. The state can be shortened.

  In addition, if the jackpot continues for a long time, the player may lose money if the game during the jackpot is not continued without taking a break. When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are prized in the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. Even if it is not, the special winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed, and the opportunity to obtain the winning ball is missed. In the present embodiment, the player can easily take a break because he can know earlier a state in which there is no possibility of becoming a big hit unless the player strikes a ball. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to execute a well-defined game.

  Next, main processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this main processing. As described above, this main process is a process of executing main control of the game in a cycle of 4 ms.

  Of the main processing (see FIG. 58), in the processing of S1101 to S1103 and S1106 to S1116, each of S1101 to S1103 and S1106 to S1116 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment The same process as the process is performed. Then, in the main processing in the second embodiment, the jackpot control processing 2 (S1121) is executed instead of the jackpot control processing (S1104) in the first embodiment, and further, instead of the special variation control processing (S1105), Special variation control processing 2 (S1122) is executed. Details of these processes will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60 that follow.

  First, the above-mentioned jackpot control process 2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2. In the jackpot control process 2, similarly to the jackpot control process (refer to FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, setting of opening and closing of the specified winning opening (large opening port) 65a in the jackpot or setting of the start of a new round is performed. This is processing for setting a round number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the processes of S1201 to S1210 in the jackpot control process 2, the same processes as the processes of S1201 to S1210 in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, in the big hit control process 2 in the second embodiment, the end of the big hit is set (S1208), and 12, 8 and 8 are set respectively in the probability variation counter 203e, the hour reduction counter 203f, and the special variation counter 203g ( S1209) Then, a counter value corresponding to 8 seconds is set in the clock counter 203j, and a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the stop period counter 203k (S1221). Here, since the time counter 203 j is a counter which is decremented by 1 (ie every 4 ms) at each main processing (see FIG. 58), the counter value corresponding to 8 seconds (ie 8000 ms) is 2000. . Further, as described above, since the stop period counter 203k is a counter which is decremented by one in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 55) executed every 2 ms, the counter corresponding to 2 seconds (that is, 2000 ms) The value is 1000. When the setting of each counter is completed by the process of S1221, the special variation flag is set to ON (S1222), and the process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the special variation control process 2 (S1122) executed in the main process (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the special variation control process 2. The special variation control process 2 determines based on the value of the time counter 203j whether or not it is the timing to end the pseudo interval effect, and if it is the end timing, the special variation end command for terminating the pseudo interval effect Is a process of setting

  In this special variation control process 2, it is first determined whether or not the special variation in progress flag 203l is on (S1311), and if it is determined that the special variation in progress flag 203l is off (S1311), Since this means that the end of the pseudo interval effect has been set, this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1311 that the special variation in progress flag 203l is on (S1311: Yes), then the value of the clock counter 203j is decremented by 1 (S1312).

  When the process of S1312 is completed, it is then determined whether the value of the count counter 203j after subtraction is 0 (S1313). If it is determined that it is not 0 (ie, 1 or more) (S1313: No) ), Which means that the timing for setting the end of the pseudo interval effect has not been reached (that is, within 8 seconds from the end of the jackpot), so this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the clock counter b 203 j is 0 (S 1313: Yes), it means that it is the timing to set the end of the pseudo interval effect (that is, 8 seconds have passed since the end of the jackpot). Therefore, the special variation end command is set (S1302), the special variation in progress flag 203l is set to OFF (S1314), and the process is ended. As described above, by configuring to set the special variation end command when 8 seconds have elapsed from the end of the big hit, the start condition is not satisfied in the special variation period, and the number of holding balls is zero. Even in the state (no fluctuation state), the execution period of the pseudo interval effect can be made to coincide with the interval effect. Therefore, since eight fluctuation pattern effects are not executed, it is possible to suppress the pseudo interval effect from continuing indefinitely. The special variation end command set by the process of S1302 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 201. Is sent to the audio lamp control unit 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special variation end command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display special variation end command to the display control device 114. When the display control unit 114 receives the display special variation end command, an effect of ending the pseudo interval effect is executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the time counting counter 203j is configured to be able to count an elapsed time after the end of the jackpot. Here, when the fluctuation pattern production is executed without intervals during special fluctuation, the special fluctuation period ends 8 seconds after the big hit end, and the pseudo interval effect can be ended, but in the special fluctuation period, the starting condition is Is not established, and the number of balls held is zero (no fluctuation), the termination condition of the special fluctuation period is not satisfied, and there is a possibility that the pseudo-interval effect may be continued indefinitely. The

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the pseudo interval effect is ended when it is determined that the predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed by the count value of the clock counter 203j even during the special fluctuation period. It is configured to set. By configuring in this way, the end of the pseudo interval effect is set even if the start condition is not satisfied in the special change period and the number of balls held is zero (no change). As a result, it is possible to suppress the pseudo interval effect from being continued indefinitely without the termination condition of the special variation period being established.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in the special fluctuation period, when the state of fluctuation does not occur and it is detected that the player has stopped the game, the predetermined time (eight seconds) has not elapsed. However, the main controller 110 is configured to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of the end of the pseudo interval effect. This allows the player to recognize that there is no possibility of becoming a big hit unless the ball next wins to the first ball entrance 64, before the end of the special variation period. Thus, for example, the player can not launch the game ball to the player who has stopped the game, for example, to concentrate on the effect of whether or not the jackpot continues, so the game is stopped. The state can be shortened.

  In addition, if the jackpot continues for a long time, the player may lose money if the game during the jackpot is not continued without taking a break. When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are prized in the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. Even if it is not, the special winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed, and the opportunity to obtain the winning ball is missed. In the present embodiment, the player can easily take a break because he can know earlier a state in which there is no possibility of becoming a big hit unless the player strikes a ball. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to execute a well-defined game.

  In this embodiment, the elapsed time after the end of the jackpot is counted by the clock counter 203j provided in the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a counter means is provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the elapsed time is measured by the audio lamp control device 113. If it is determined that a predetermined period (8 seconds) has elapsed, pseudo-interval effect production May be configured to end. As a result, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, so processing with high importance in the game, such as processing for executing a lottery of special symbols, can be reliably executed. Further, in this case, the variation pattern effect in the special variation period may be selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d as in the normal time. In addition, when a variation pattern command indicating a big hit is output from main controller 110 before the predetermined period has elapsed, pseudo-interval effect is produced by voice lamp control device 113 until at least the variation pattern of the big hit is finished. May be extended. Thus, the special variation pattern selection table 202e can be omitted, so the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, in the special variation period, when the start condition is not satisfied and the number of holding balls becomes zero (no variation), the pseudo interval effect end display is set. However, it is also possible to display a completely different presentation of the system. For example, an effect may be performed such as prompting the player to take a break. Further, for example, before the pseudo interval effect is shortened and ended, a display may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to urge the player to operate the handle 51. The display for prompting the operation is, for example, a display indicating that the pseudo interval effect is to be ended if the operation is not performed. As a result, when the player has stopped the operation in order to thoroughly enjoy the effect, the effect can be confirmed until the end by resuming the operation. Also, if the player continues to play the game without taking a break due to the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect continuing for a long time, etc., it is recognized that the effect is interrupted and it is time to take a break. Can.

  In the present embodiment, the pseudo interval effect is configured to end when the start condition is not satisfied in the special change period and the state where the number of holding balls is zero (the state of no change) continues for two seconds. However, the condition for ending the effect is not limited to this, and the period may be longer or longer than 2 seconds. In addition, when the jackpot is read at the end, if there is no lottery result for the held ball (or the number of held balls is 0), the end indication at the end of the jackpot (or a break for the player) And the like) may be performed. By configuring in this manner, the jackpot round is completed, and it is possible to make the player take a break at a time when the paragraph comes.

  In addition, when the start condition is not satisfied during the special variation period or at the end of the big hit, and the number of holding balls becomes zero (no change), the end display (or the player) It may be configured such that the player can select whether or not to perform an effect such as prompting a break. For example, when a predetermined operation such as operating the frame button 22 is performed during a jackpot, effects such as prompting a break to the player may be performed. As a result, for a player who has just taken a sufficient rest, an effect or the like which urges a rest again is displayed at short time intervals, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling troublesome.

  In this embodiment, although it is configured to set the end of the pseudo interval effect when 8 seconds have passed since the end of the jackpot, even if the pseudo interval effect is ended, the predetermined number of times (eight times) The aspect (variation time) of fluctuation pattern production is selected from special fluctuation pattern selection table 202e until fluctuation pattern production of is executed. In this case, it may be configured to execute an effect different from that during the normal period until the variation pattern effect is completed eight times (or twelve times when the high probability state of the special symbol ends). As an effect different from the normal time, for example, an effect that searches for a door different from the door which can not be opened in the pseudo interval effect is performed. In addition, while the effect different from the normal time is being executed, the fluctuation pattern effect may be reduced and displayed in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81 as in the pseudo-interval effect. Good. With this configuration, it is shorter than a normal time such as 1 second or 0.5 second (that is, a state in which a fluctuation pattern effect of fluctuation time of 5 seconds to 30 seconds is selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d) The variation pattern effect is continuously executed in the entire third symbol display device 81, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable. Also, it is possible to make the player recognize that once the jackpot has ended, it can be expected to become the jackpot again (that is, it is in the high probability state of the special symbol).

  In this embodiment, updating of the time counter 203j is configured to be performed in the special variation control process 2 (S1122) of the main process (see FIG. 58) executed every 4 ms, but executed every 2 ms. It may be configured to be performed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 55). Thus, the time counter 203j can be updated with a finer time width.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the value of the stop period counter 203k is configured to be updated in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 55), but is configured to be performed in the main process (see FIG. 58). You may The value of the stop period counter 203k is used to determine whether the pseudo interval effect is shortened and ended or not, and even if it is determined that the shortening and ended is delayed by several ms, the normal pseudo interval This is because the presentation only continues and there is no disadvantage.

Third Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, the specific winning hole (large opening) 65 a is provided immediately below the first ball entry port 64. As a result, in each round of the jackpot, the player strikes the ball in an attempt to win the ball in the specific winning opening 65a, so that the ball is easily entered into the first ball entrance 64 during the jackpot. This makes it easy to increase the number of holding balls during the jackpot, so that it is difficult to generate a situation in which the number of holding balls does not exist in the special variation period set after the end of the jackpot and the fluctuation is not performed. That is, the termination condition of the special variation period is not satisfied, and it is difficult to cause the pseudo interval effect to continue endlessly.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, two types of ball entrances (first ball entrance 64 and second ball entrance 640) are provided, and one ball entrance (second ball entrance 640) Is provided directly above the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a. Furthermore, the motorized accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is configured to be easily released into the jackpot. This makes it easy to win the ball hit by the player during the big hit into the second entrance 640, so the number of holding balls does not exist in the special variation period set after the end of the big hit. The situation where no change is made can be made more difficult to occur.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration in that the game board 13 is electrically connected to the second entrance 640 and the second entrance 640. The point that the accessory 640a is provided, the content of the first hit type selection table 202b of the ROM 202 is partially changed in the main control device 110, the point that the state setting table 202f is newly added, the RAM 203 A special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a1, a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203a2, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c1, a special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203c2, and a state transition counter 203m, and a point The partial process included in the main process (see FIG. 31) is the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Is a point that is different. The other configurations, other processes executed by the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are described in the first embodiment. Are identical to the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted. In the following, the drawing of the special symbol performed based on entering the first ball entrance 64 will be referred to as the drawing of the special symbol 1 (special figure 1) (special figure 1), and the second ball entering The lottery of the special symbol performed based on entering the ball to 640 is described as the lottery of the special symbol 2 (special figure 2).

  First, with reference to FIG. 61, the game board 13 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a view showing an outline of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 61, in the gaming board 13 of the third embodiment, a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at the lower right portion in a front view. Then, a second ball entry port 640 is provided right above the specified winning hole (large opening) 65a. The second ball entry port 640 is accompanied by a motorized symbol 640a, and when the symbol is normally hit, the motorized symbol 640a is rotated about a direction perpendicular to the game board 13 , It becomes easy to win the ball to the second entrance.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the second ball entry port 640 is provided directly above the specific winning hole (large opening) 65a, the specific winning hole (large opening) is detected during the jackpot. ) A ball shot for aiming at 65 a is likely to enter the second entrance 640. Furthermore, since the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is configured to be easily released during the jackpot, the number of holding balls tends to be maximum (four) at the end of the jackpot.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 62 (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 62A, the ROM 202 of this embodiment defines a state setting table 202f in addition to the configuration of the ROM 202 of the first embodiment. The state setting table 202f is a data table that is referred to in order to set the state after the end of the jackpot. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, settings such as after the big hit end are different according to the big hit type. In the state setting table 202f, setting values are defined in association with the states to be set.

  FIG. 62 (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 62 (b), the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a1 is replaced with the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a provided in the RAM 203 of the first embodiment in the RAM 203 of this embodiment, and A special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203a2 is provided. Each of these is configured to have one execution area and four reserve areas (preserve first area to reserve fourth area).

  In the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a1, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 , Is an area where each value is stored. On the other hand, in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203 a 2, the first hit random number counter C 1, the first hit type counter C 2, and the stop type selection counter C 3 acquired at the timing when the ball wins to the second entrance 640. It is an area in which each value is stored.

  Further, in the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 c 1 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 c 2 instead of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 c provided in the RAM 203 of the first embodiment. Is provided. The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c1 is a variation display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the first ball entry port 64 (start winning combination) The special symbol 2 suspension ball number counter 203c2 is a counter that counts the number of balls held (number of waits) of the fluctuation display performed on the display device 81 up to 4 times, and the ball into the second entrance 640 (starting) The number of holding balls (number of waits) of the fluctuation display (the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on winning) is up to 4 times It is a counter to count.

  Further, in the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, a state transition counter 203m is provided instead of the time saving counter 203f provided in the RAM 203 of the first embodiment. This state transition counter 203m is a counter indicating whether or not the low probability state of the normal symbol is in progress, and if the value of the state transition counter 203m is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the normal symbol Indicates that there is. On the other hand, if the value of the state transition counter 203m is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is set to a high probability state of a normal symbol in a normal state, and part of the big hit (big hit E), a predetermined number of times after the big hit The low probability state of the normal symbol (100 times) is set. The state transition counter 203m is used to count whether or not the predetermined number of times has elapsed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the first hit type selection table 202b of the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot, "big hit E" which does not shift to the high probability state of the special symbol or to the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol is added. As shown in FIG. 63, in the first collision type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random number value is “0 to 8” is “jackpot A”. Also, the jackpot type when the value is "9 to 16" is "big hit B", and the jackpot type when the value is "17 to 47" is "big hit C" and the value is "48 , 49 "is" jackpot D ", and the jackpot type when the value is" 50 to 99 "is" jackpot E ". That is, when it becomes a big hit, it is constituted so that half will be "big hit E".

  As mentioned above, if it becomes "big hit E", it will shift to the low probability state of special symbol after the end of the big hit, and it will shift to the normal state of the normal symbol, so the probability of becoming big hit again at short intervals after the end of the big hit Is low. That is, it is a jackpot which is disadvantageous for the player as compared with other jackpot types. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of holding balls in the big hit tends to be the largest by making the big hit in the high probability state of the normal symbol. In addition, in the game rules, the state of the normal symbol in the so-called normal state (the state where it transitions when the power is turned on by pressing the RAM erase switch 122) and the state of the normal symbol in the jackpot match In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is set as the high probability state of the normal symbol even in the normal state because it is defined that it is necessary. For this reason, if you do not provide a "big hit E" to shift to the low probability state of the normal symbol after the end of the big hit, the game will always be a high probability state of the normal symbol, giving the hole an unforeseen disadvantage There is a risk of On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the "big hit E" which shifts to the low probability state of the normal symbol after the big hit ends is provided, it is possible to suppress giving an unexpected disadvantage to the hole.

  Next, referring to FIG. 64, the state setting table 202f defined in the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 (a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the state setting table 202f.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (a), when setting the normal state as the state of the pachinko machine 10 or when setting the jackpot, it is set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol is It is set. Here, when setting the normal state, for example, when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed, or after the low probability state of the normal symbol of the predetermined number of times is set after the big hit, special This is the case, for example, when the number of times the symbol has been drawn reaches a predetermined number. Also, at the beginning of the jackpot, it is set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, so the number of holding balls is likely to be the largest during the jackpot.

  Also, after the end of the jackpots A to D, a high probability state of the special symbol is set and a high probability state of the normal symbol is set. The high probability state of the special symbol continues until the drawing of the special symbol is performed 12 times, and then the low probability state of the special symbol is set. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, since it is a high probability state of a normal symbol in a normal state, the state of a normal symbol is set to the same state as a normal state after completion of jackpots A to D. That is, the condition of the normal symbol is the same as that of the jackpot. Therefore, even if it pays attention to the state of the ordinary symbol, there is no change between the big hit and after the big hit A to D, so it is necessary to distinguish between the big hit in the interval production and the big hit after the pseudo interval production It can be more difficult. In addition, the high probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol after the end of the jackpot A to D continues at least until the next jackpot.

  On the other hand, at the end of the jackpot E, the low probability state of the special symbol is set, and the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. The low probability state of the special symbol continues at least until the next big hit. In addition, the low probability state of the normal symbol continues until the drawing of the special symbol is performed 100 times. In addition, after the lottery of the special symbol is performed 100 times, the normal state is set. That is, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64 (b), the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 64 (b), in the present embodiment, three types of states are exchanged to each other. Specifically, the normal state, the probability variation state, and the low probability state. The normal state is, as described above, a state in which transition is made when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Moreover, a definite change state is a high probability state of a special symbol, and is a state set when one of jackpots A to D ends. Furthermore, the low certainty state refers to a low probability state of a special symbol and a low probability state of a normal symbol, and is a state set when the jackpot E ends.

  In addition, the characters “right-handed navi” or “left-handed navi” written in parentheses on the right of each state name indicate the direction for displaying the ball launch direction to the player in each state. ing. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 displays the direction in which the player should shoot the ball. The navigation is configured to display a direction that is advantageous to the player in each state.

  First, in the normal state, the third symbol display device 81 displays a right-handed navigation, that is, a display that recommends launching of the game ball on the right side of the board. That is, the suggestion display is performed so as to strike the second ball entry port 640 provided on the right side in a front view with respect to the game board 13 and launch a ball. In the normal state, it is a high probability state of the normal symbol, and it is easy for the ball to hit the second entrance 640 because it is easier for the player to hit the ball at the second entrance 640. . This normal condition continues until one of the big wins.

  In the normal state, when one of the jackpots A to D is reached, the state changes to the definite change state after the jackpot ends. Even in this definite variation state, the right-handed navigation is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This definite change state continues until the lottery of the special symbol is executed 12 times without winning the jackpot, or the jackpot E is won. In addition, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed 12 times without winning the jackpot, the state shifts to the normal state, and when the jackpot E is won, the state shifts to the low probability state after the end of the jackpot.

  In the low probability state, which shifts when the jackpot E is won in the normal state or the definite change state, the third symbol display device 81 displays a left-handed navigation, that is, a display that recommends launching of the game ball on the right side of the board. Be done. That is, a suggestion display is performed so as to strike the first ball entry port 64 provided in the lower center of the game board 13 and launch a ball. In the low probability state, the first ball entrance 64 is easier to win the ball than the second ball entrance 640. This low certainty state continues until the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times without winning the jackpot, or until any of the jackpots A to D are won. In addition, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times without winning in the big hit, it shifts to the normal state, and when it wins in any of the big hits A to D, it shifts to the definite variation state.

  Although illustration is omitted, right-handed navigation is configured to be displayed also in each round of the jackpot. In the present embodiment, since the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided on the right side in the front view of the game board 13, the ball is to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a if the ball is not hit to the right It is because it is difficult to win a prize.

  Further, as described above, since the jackpot is set to the normal state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, since the motorized role product 640a attached to the second entry ball opening 640 is easily released, the ball launched toward the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is the ball of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. It becomes easier to win the second ball entry located directly above. For this reason, in most cases, the number of holding balls is 4 which is the maximum value by the end of the jackpot. Furthermore, when there is a lottery result that is a big hit among the holding balls, it becomes “big hit E” with a probability of 50% (see FIG. 63). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the jackpot and the pseudo interval effect from being repeated long, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unexpected disadvantage to the hole in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed.

<About control processing of main controller in the third embodiment>
Next, various types of processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this timer interrupt process. As described above, this timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed every two milliseconds.

  Among the timer interrupt processes, the processes of S101 to S103 and S107 to S109 are respectively the same as the processes of S101 to S103 and S107 to S109 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) in the first embodiment. Processing is performed. And, in the timer interruption process in the third embodiment, the special symbol variation process 3 in place of the special symbol variation process (S104), the start winning process (S105) and the normal symbol variation process (S106) in the first embodiment (S121), start winning process 2 (S122), and normal symbol variation process 2 (S123) are executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the above-described special symbol variation process 3 (S121) will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 3 (S121). The special symbol variation processing 3 (S121) is, like the special symbol variation processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 22), the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, or the third It is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in the symbol display device 81 and the like.

  Of the special symbol variation processing 3, S201, S202, S209 to S215, and S218 to S220, respectively, in the special symbol variation processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 22) S201, S202, S209 to S215, and The same process as each process of S218 to S220 is performed. And, in the special symbol fluctuation process 3 in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is not changing in the process of S202 (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203c2 (second input The number N2 of holdings of the variable display in the special symbol based on the winning on the ball exit 640 is acquired (S221). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203c2 is larger than 0 (S222), and it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203c2 is larger than 0 (S222: Yes) subtracts 1 from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203c2 (S223), and indicates the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203c2 after subtraction A holding ball number command is set (S225). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201 is a voice. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203c2 from the holding ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223 Do.

  After setting the special figure 2 holding ball number command by the process of S225, the data stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203a2 is shifted (S225), and the special symbol variation start process is performed (S208). End the process. In addition, about the method to shift data, it is the same as the process of S207 of the special symbol variation process (refer FIG. 22) in 1st Embodiment mentioned above.

  On the other hand, in the process of S222, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203c2 is 0 (S222: No), then, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c1 (first The number N1 of holdings of the variable display in the special symbol based on the winning on the entrance 64 is acquired (S225).

  Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c1 acquired by the processing of S225 is larger than 0 (S226), and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203c2 is If it is 0 (S226: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203c2 is larger than 1 (S226: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c1 is decremented by 1 ( S227), a ball holding number command indicating the value of the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c1 after subtraction is set (S228). The holding ball number command set here is also stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 and is the main process executed by the MPU 201 (the same as the holding ball number command set by the process of S224 described above) In the external output process (S1101) (see FIG. 69), the signal is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c1 from the holding ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223 Do.

  After setting the special figure 1 holding ball number command by the process of S228, the data stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a1 is shifted (S229), and the special symbol variation start process is performed (S208). End the process. In addition, about the method to shift data, it is the same as the process of S207 of the special symbol variation process (refer FIG. 22) in 1st Embodiment mentioned above.

  Thus, in special symbol fluctuation processing 3 of this embodiment, the number of balls reserved for special symbol 1 and the number of balls reserved for special symbol 2 are separately managed, and the priority for holding balls of special symbol 2 is prioritized at the start of fluctuation. Are configured to subtract. This is because the lottery of the special symbol 2 is configured to be executed preferentially.

  Further, in the special symbol variation process 3 in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203e during the probability change is 0 (S214: No), or the value of the counter 203e during probability change is determined to be larger than 0 S214: Yes) When the value of the in-probability counter 203e is decremented by 1, the processing is shifted to S230. In the process of S230, it is determined whether the value of the state transition counter 203m is a value larger than 0 (S230).

  If it is determined in the process of S230 that the value of the state transition counter 203m is greater than 0 (S230: Yes), the value of the state transition counter 203m is decremented by 1 (S231), and the process proceeds to S218. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S230 that the value of the state transition counter 203m is not larger than 0 (ie, it is 0) (S230: No), the process of S231 is skipped and the process proceeds to S218. Do. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the current state is the low probability state of the normal symbol based on the value of the state transition counter 203m.

  Next, the above-described start winning process 2 (S122) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 2 (S122). The start winning process 2 (S122) determines the presence or absence of a winning (start winning) at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, and when there is a start winning, a value indicated by various random number counters From the value indicated by the various reserved random number counters, it is a process for executing prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol.

  Of the start winning process 2, in the process of S601, the same process as the process of S601 in the start winning process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment is executed. And, in the start winning process 2 in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), the value of special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c1 (in special symbol 1 The number of holding N1 of variable display is acquired (S621). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c1 is less than the upper limit value (ie, 4) (S622).

  And if there is no winning on the first entrance 64 (S601: No) or if there is a winning on the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c1 is 4 If it is determined that the length is not less than (ie, 4) (S603: No), the process proceeds to S626. On the other hand, if there is a winning on the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c1 is less than 4 (S622: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203c1 is incremented by 1 (S623). And the ball holding ball number command which shows the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c1 changed by calculation is set (S624).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201 is a voice. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c1 from the holding ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223 Do.

  After setting the holding ball number command in the process of S624, the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 65) is acquired (S625).

  When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is acquired by the process of S625, or when it is determined that there is no winning at the first ball entrance 64 by the process of S601 (S601: No) or the first entering If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c1 is not less than 4 (that is, 4) even if there is a winning on the ball mouth 64 (S603: No), then the ball is It is determined whether or not the second entry ball slot 640 has been won (S626).

  In the process of S626, if it is determined that the ball has won the second entrance 640 (S626: Yes), the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203c2 (number of holding N2 of the variable display in the special symbol 2) Acquire (S627). Then, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203c2 is less than the upper limit value (ie, 4) (S628).

  And if there is no winning on the second entrance 640 (S626: No) or if there is a winning on the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203c2 is 4 If it is determined that the length is not less than (ie, 4) (S628: No), the process proceeds to S632. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the second entrance 640 (S626: Yes), and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203c2 is less than 4 (S628: Yes), the special symbol 2 holding The value (N2) of the ball number counter 203c2 is incremented by 1 (S629). And the ball holding ball number command which shows the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203c2 changed by calculation is set (S630).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201 is a voice. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203c2 from the holding ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223 Do.

  After setting the holding ball number command in the process of S630, the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 65) is acquired (S631).

  When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is acquired by the process of S631, or when it is determined that there is no winning at the second entrance 640 by the process of S626 (S626: No) or the second entry If it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203c2 is not less than 4 (that is, 4) even if there is a winning on the ball mouth 640 (S628: No), the prefetching process Then (S632), the process ends. This pre-reading process (S632) is a process for determining in advance the lottery result of the special symbol from each counter value acquired based on the start winning. The prefetching process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the above-described prefetching process (S632). In this pre-reading process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has newly won the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. When it is determined that there is no new winning combination in either of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 (S4101: No), the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, when there is a new winning on either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S4101: Yes), each processing of S4102 to S4110 is executed. In the processes of S4102 to S4110, the same processes as the processes of S607 to S615 of the start winning process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, the number of holding balls is separately managed according to the type of the ball entrance into which the ball has entered, and pre-reading is performed for the start winning for any ball entrance. Are configured to

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the above-described normal symbol variation processing 2 (S123) will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process 2 (S123). The normal symbol variation processing 2 (S123) is the same as the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment, the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device 83, the first entrance 64 Is a process for controlling the opening time of the motorized accessory attached to the

  In each of S701 to S707, S712, S713, S718, and S722 to S725 of the normal symbol variation processing 2 (S123), S701 to S707 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment. The same processes as those of steps S712, S713, S718, and S722 to S725 are executed. And, in the normal symbol fluctuation processing 2 in the third embodiment, when the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired in the processing of S707 (S707) Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the state transition counter 203m is larger than 1 (that is, whether or not it is a low probability state of a normal symbol) (S731).

  In the process of S731, when it is determined that the value of the state transition counter 203m is larger than 0 (S731: Yes), it indicates that the current state is a low probability state of a normal symbol, so the second acquired in the process of S707. The lottery result of the normal symbol is acquired based on the value of the winning random number counter C4 and the normal symbol per random number table for low probability (S732). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 9A).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S731 that the value of the state transition counter 203m is 0 (S731: No), it indicates that the current state is a high probability state (time saving state) of a normal symbol. Based on the value of the second collision random number counter C4 acquired in the process and the random symbol per symbol table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the symbol is a normal symbol is acquired (S733). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 9A). After the process of S732 or the process of S733 ends, the process proceeds to S712.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when setting the start of the big hit of a special symbol, it is comprised so that the value of the state transfer counter 203m may be reset (that is, it may clear 0). For this reason, since the value of the state transition counter 203m is determined to be 0 during the big hit of the special symbol, it is determined whether or not the hit of the normal symbol is based on the random symbol table for high probability during the big hit. Ru. That is, during the jackpot, the probability of becoming a hit of the normal symbol is higher than that of the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is likely to be released, so it is possible to easily win a ball for the second ball entry port 640 during a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the number of retained balls to reach the maximum value (ie, four) by the end of the jackpot.

  By the process of S712, it is determined that a normal symbol is hit (S712: Yes), and when the display mode at the time of hit is set by the process of S713 (S713), then, the value of the state transition counter 203m is greater than 0 or not It is determined (S734). Then, when it is determined that the value of the state transition counter 203m is larger than 0 (S734: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the motorized role object 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 The open period is set to 0.2 seconds, and the open frequency is set to 1 (S735), and the process proceeds to S737. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the state transition counter 203m is 0 (S734: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is normally in a high probability state (short time state) of the symbol, it accompanies the second entry port 640 The opening period of the motorized accessory 640a is set to one second, and the number of times of opening is set to two (S736), and the process proceeds to the processing of S737.

  In addition, as mentioned above, 0 is set to the value of the state transition counter 203m during the big hit, so when it becomes a hit of the normal symbol during the big hit, the motorized role 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 The open period of is set to 1 second, and the open frequency is set to 2 times. Therefore, since it becomes easy for the ball to win to the second entrance ball entrance 640 during the big hit, the number of holding balls can easily become the maximum value (that is, 4) by the end of the big hit.

  In the process of S737, it is determined whether the value of the state transition counter state transition counter 203m is larger than 0 (S737). And when it is determined that the value of the state transition counter 203m is larger than 0 (that is, it is in the low probability state of the normal symbol) (S737: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is 30 It sets to second (S738) and ends this processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the state transition counter 203m is 0 (ie, it is in the high probability state of the normal symbol) (S737: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is 3 It sets to second (S739), and ends this processing.

  As described above, since the value of the state transition counter 203m is set to 0 during the big hit, when performing the variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) during the big hit, during the low probability state of the normal symbol In comparison, a short fluctuation period (3 seconds) is selected. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the number of times of fluctuation of the normal symbol during the jackpot, it is also possible to increase the number of times the normal symbol is hit during the jackpot. Therefore, since the ball is likely to be won to the second entrance ball entrance 640 during the jackpot, the number of holding balls can easily be the maximum value (i.e., four) by the end of the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing this main processing. As described above, this main process is a process of executing main control of the game in a cycle of 4 ms.

  Of the main processing (see FIG. 70), in the processing of S1101 to S1103 and S1105 to S1116, the processing of S1101 to S1103 and S1105 to S1116 in the main processing (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment are performed, respectively. The same process is performed. Then, in the main processing in the third embodiment, the jackpot control processing 3 (S1131) is executed instead of the jackpot control processing (S1104) in the first embodiment. Details of the jackpot control process 3 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 3. In the jackpot control process 3, similarly to the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, the setting of opening and closing of the specified winning opening (big opening port) 65a in the jackpot is performed or the start of a new round is performed. This is processing for setting a round number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the respective processes of S1201 to S1208 and S1210 of the jackpot control process 3, the same processes as the respective processes of S1201 to S1208 and S1210 in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment are executed. Ru. Then, in the jackpot control process 3 in the third embodiment, when the end of the jackpot is set (S1208), next, based on the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 64A), the setting value corresponding to the state after the jackpot is It reads out and sets (S1231), and ends this processing. Since the setting values according to the state are defined in the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 64A), in this S1231, the state to be set out of the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 64A) is simply set. It is sufficient to execute the simple process of selecting the setting value corresponding to. Therefore, for example, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced as compared to the case of executing a program that calculates the set value according to the state. Therefore, the state after the big hit can be set without delay.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the second ball entry port 640 of the two types of ball entry ports (the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640) is specified winning hole (Large opening) It is set as the structure provided right above 65a. Then, in the normal state, the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is configured to be easily released (in other words, a high probability state of a normal symbol). By configuring in this manner, the motorized accessory 640 a attached to the second entrance 640 can be easily released during a jackpot that requires the normal symbol state to be the same as the normal state. This makes it easy to win the ball hit by the player during the big hit into the second entrance 640, so the number of holding balls does not exist in the special variation period set after the end of the big hit. The situation where no change is made can be made less likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the continuation of the pseudo interval effect without the end of the special variation period, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In addition, when the pseudo interval effect is ended in a predetermined time (10 seconds) regardless of whether or not the variation pattern effect is performed eight times, a state of no variation (the variation pattern effect is not executed. And, as the state in which there is no holding ball is more likely to occur, the number of drawing times of the special symbol executed during the pseudo interval effect decreases. Therefore, the possibility of becoming a big hit again becomes low after pseudo interval production. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the ball easily wins the second entrance 640 during the big hit, the number of holding balls of the special symbol 2 is easily maximized. Therefore, since it can suppress that it will be in a state of no fluctuation during pseudo | simulation interval production, the possibility of becoming a big hit again can be raised through pseudo | simulation interval production. Therefore, the appearance of the player can be made to feel as if the jackpot state has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution that is "big hit E" (that is, a big hit that shifts to a disadvantage for the player after the end of the big hit compared to other big hit types) was a big hit Although it is 50% of the case, it is not limited to this and may be set arbitrarily. For example, in the case where it is determined that the ball-out rate becomes too high when the distribution of "big hit E" is 50%, etc., the percentage of "big hit E" becomes 60% or 70%, for example. It is good also as composition which increases the jackpot which becomes disadvantageous for the person. On the other hand, if it is determined that the bowling rate becomes too low, etc., by setting the proportion of "big hit E" to, for example, 40% or 30%, the jackpot which is disadvantageous for the player is reduced. It is also good.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the same jackpot type is selected if the value of the first hit type counter value CS1 in the case of a big hit is the same regardless of the type of the ball entry slot where the ball is won. However, different jackpot types may be selected according to the type of the ball entrance. For example, if the ball wins on the basis of winning to the first ball entrance 64, the jackpot E is greater than if the ball wins on the basis of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640. It may be difficult to select. Thereby, the jackpot E can be made difficult to be continuous. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress that the low probability state of the ordinary symbol which is disadvantageous for the player is repeated endlessly, it is possible to suppress the player's motivation for the game from being cut. In addition, the jackpot E in the case where the ball became a big hit based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 than when the ball became a big ball based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 May be selected easily. As a result, it is possible to prevent the jackpots A to D from being continuous, and the high probability state of the normal symbols advantageous to the player to be repeated long. Therefore, it can suppress that the ball-drawing rate of the pachinko machine 10 becomes high too much, and brings an unexpected disadvantage to a hole.

<Modification of Third Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. In the third embodiment, two kinds of ball entrances (first ball entrance 64 and second ball entrance 640) are provided, and by setting to a high probability state of a normal symbol during a big hit, the first 2 The ball was easy to enter the ball entrance 640. As a result, the number of balls held is likely to reach the maximum value (ie, 4) during a jackpot.

  In addition to this, in the present modification, two specific winning openings (specific winning opening 65a, specific winning opening 650a) are provided, and the jackpot is terminated when the ball is won to the specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot. It is configured to shift to a special symbol high probability state later. In addition, the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 650a is configured to be different between the case where a big hit is made by the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the case where the jackpot is made by the lottery of the special symbol 2. That is, the easiness of transition to the high probability state of the special symbol is made to differ depending on whether the special symbol 1 has won the large symbol or the special symbol 2 has resulted in the large symbol. Although details will be described later, by providing a ball entry port that is difficult to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol, it is possible to suppress that the ball out rate becomes too high. In addition, by providing a ball entry that is easy to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol, the ball enters the ball into the ball entry opening, thereby giving the player a sense of expectation for the high probability state of the special symbol. I can hold it.

  First, with reference to FIG. 72, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification will be described. FIG. 72 is a view showing an outline of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 72, in the gaming board 13 in the modification of the third embodiment, as in the third embodiment, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in the lower right portion in a front view. Then, a second ball entry port 640 is provided right above the specified winning hole (large opening) 65a. The second ball entry port 640 is accompanied by a motorized symbol 640a, and when the symbol is normally hit, the motorized symbol 640a is rotated about a direction perpendicular to the game board 13 , It becomes easy to win the ball to the second entrance.

  In addition, in the present modification, the variable winning device 650 is provided in the lower left direction of the first entrance 64. The variable winning device 650 is constituted by a specific winning hole 650a and a motorized jack 650b attached to the specified winning hole 650. Normally, the specified jack 650a is closed by the electric jack 650b and the ball is held. It is considered difficult to enter the ball. On the other hand, in a predetermined round of the jackpot (for example, the second round), the motorized prize 650b is operated for a certain period (for example, 0.5 seconds or 5 seconds), and the specified winning opening 650a is opened. As a result, the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 650a, and if it can win the ball, it shifts to a special symbol high probability state. The high probability state of the special symbol continues until the drawing of the special symbol is performed 12 times, as in the third embodiment. Thus, whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol is determined depending on whether or not the ball has won the specific winning opening 650a, so whether to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol or not Can be made visually easy to understand. In addition, since it is possible for the player to devise a timing etc. to launch the ball, if the player can enter the ball into the specified winning opening 650a, he has acquired a high probability state of special symbol by himself. As a result, the player can feel a sense of satisfaction and accomplishment.

  Further, as described above, since the specified winning hole 650a is disposed at the lower left of the first ball entry port 64, the player is specified in the round (for example, the second round) in which the specified winning hole 650a is opened. The ball launched in an attempt to win a prize in the winning opening 650a is also likely to be won in the first ball entry port 64. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, in the big hit, the holding balls of the special symbol 2 are easily stored, but in this modification, in addition to this, a predetermined round (for example, the second round) The special symbol 1's holding ball is configured to be easy to increase. Since the maximum number of balls reserved for special symbol 1 and the number of balls reserved for special symbol 2 can be stored up to four each, in the present modification, the total number of balls reserved for the big hit is 8 in total. It can easily be in the state of one. Thereby, in the special variation period set after the end of the jackpot, it is possible to make it difficult for the situation that the number of holding balls does not exist and the variation is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the continuation of the pseudo interval effect without the end of the special variation period, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In addition, when the pseudo interval effect is ended in a predetermined time (10 seconds) regardless of whether or not the variation pattern effect is performed eight times, a state of no variation (the variation pattern effect is not executed. And, as the state in which there is no holding ball is more likely to occur, the number of drawing times of the special symbol executed during the pseudo interval effect decreases. Therefore, the possibility of becoming a big hit again becomes low after pseudo interval production. On the other hand, in the present modification, as described above, since the ball easily enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 in the big hit, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are retained. The ball number is configured to be the largest. Therefore, since it can suppress that it will be in a state of no fluctuation during pseudo | simulation interval production, the possibility of becoming a big hit again can be raised through pseudo | simulation interval production. Therefore, the appearance of the player can be made to feel as if the jackpot state has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the first hit type selection table 202b of this modification will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 650a is different between the case where the jackpot of the special symbol 1 is won and the case where the jackpot of the special symbol 2 is hit. In the first hit type selection table 202b of the present modification, the jackpot type and the open pattern of the specific winning opening 650a for each special symbol type are defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2. In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, the specific winning hole 650a is opened only in the second round of the jackpot, and in the other rounds (the first round and the third and subsequent rounds), the specific winning prize The port 65a is configured to be opened. The specific winning opening 650a opened in the second round is closed when the opening period defined in the first hit type selection table 202b elapses. Further, in the second round of the jackpot, a display (left-handed navi) prompting the player to launch a ball on the left side of the game board 13 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the player can be prevented from aiming at the specific winning opening 650a, so that it is possible to prevent the player from losing the opportunity to acquire the high probability state of the special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the jackpot type in the case where the value of the first punch type counter C2 is 0 to 8 is the jackpot A1 (3R short open jackpot) for which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 3 rounds. Further, in the case of winning the "big hit A1" in the special symbol 1 lottery, in the second round of the big hit, an open pattern in which the specified winning opening 650a is opened for only 0.5 seconds is set. On the other hand, in the case of winning a "big hit A1" in the special symbol 2 lottery, an open pattern is set in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 5 seconds.

  It should be noted that it takes 0.5 seconds or more for the ball to hit the specified winning opening 650a after the player hits the specific winning opening 650a and strikes the ball, so that 0.5 seconds of opening is required. When a pattern is selected, it becomes difficult to win a ball to the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, in many cases, when winning the "big hit A1" in the lottery of special symbol 1, the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the big hit end, and the low probability state of 100 times of the normal symbol is set . That is, a state corresponding to the case where the jackpot E in the third embodiment ends is set. On the other hand, if the opening pattern of 5 seconds is selected, it is often enough time for the hit ball to reach the specified winning opening 650a, so in many cases, the player specified the ball in the second round. It can be made to win the mouth 650a. Therefore, when winning the "big hit A1" in the lottery of the special symbol 2, the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the end of the big hit, and the low probability state of the normal symbol is set.

  In the jackpot type when the first hit type counter C2 has a value of 9 to 17, the number of rounds of the jackpot is 3 rounds of "jackpot A2" (3R length open jackpot). In the case of "big hit A2", regardless of whether it is a lottery of special symbol 1 or a lottery of special symbol 2, an open pattern in which the specified winning opening 650a is opened for 5 seconds is set. Therefore, in the second round of "big hit A2", it becomes easy to win the ball to the specific winning opening 650a, so in many cases, a high probability state of 12 special symbols is set after the end of the big hit, and The high probability state of the symbol is set.

  As the jackpot type when the first hit type counter C2 has a value of 18 to 24, the number of rounds of the jackpot is "round jack B1" of 4 rounds (4R short open jackpot). As with "big hit A1", when winning a "big hit B1" in the special symbol 1 lottery, an open pattern in which the specified winning opening 650a is opened for 0.5 seconds is set in the second round of the big hit . On the other hand, in the case of winning the "big hit B1" in the lottery of special symbol 2, an open pattern is set in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 5 seconds. Therefore, when winning a "big hit B1" in the lottery of special symbol 1, in many cases, the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the big hit end, and the low probability state of 100 times of the normal symbol is set . On the other hand, when winning a "big hit B1" in the special symbol 2 lottery, in many cases, a high probability state of 12 special symbols is set after the big hit ends, and a high probability state of a normal symbol is set .

  As the jackpot type when the first hit type counter C2 has a value of 25 to 31, the number of rounds of the jackpot is "round jack B2" of 4 rounds (4R length open jackpot). Similar to the "big hit A2", when winning the "big hit B2", regardless of whether it is a lottery of the special symbol 1 or the lottery of the special symbol 2, the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 5 seconds open A pattern is set. Therefore, when winning the "big hit B2", in many cases, a high probability state of the special symbol of 12 times is set after the big hit ends, and a high probability state of the normal symbol is set.

  When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 32 to 63, the number of rounds of the jackpot is 6 jacks "jacks C1" (6R short open jackpot). As with “big hit A1” and “big hit B1”, when winning a “big hit C1” in the special symbol 1 drawing, the specific winning opening 650a is opened for only 0.5 seconds in the second round of the big hit A pattern is set. On the other hand, in the case of winning the "big hit C1" in the lottery of the special symbol 2, an open pattern is set in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 5 seconds. Therefore, when winning the "big hit C1" in the lottery of special symbol 1, in many cases, the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the big hit end, and the low probability state of 100 times of the regular symbol is set . On the other hand, when winning a "big hit C1" in the special symbol 2 lottery, in many cases, a high probability state of 12 special symbols is set after the big hit end and a high probability state of a normal symbol is set .

  In the jackpot type when the first hit type counter C2 has a value of 64 to 95, the number of rounds of the jackpot is 6 rounds of "big hit C2" (6R length open big hit). Similar to "big hit A2" and "big hit B2", when winning a "big hit C2", whether it is a lottery of special symbol 1 or a lottery of special symbol 2, the specific winning opening 650a is 5 An open pattern to be opened for a second is set. Therefore, when winning the "big hit C2", in many cases, a high probability state of 12 special symbols is set after the big hit end, and a high probability state of a normal symbol is set.

  When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 96, 97, the number of rounds of the jackpot is 15 rounds of jackpot D1 (15R short open jackpot). As with “big hit A1”, “big hit B1”, and “big hit C1”, when winning a “big hit D1” in the special symbol 1 lottery, the specified winning opening 650 a is 0.5 in the second round of the big hit. An open pattern which is open for only seconds is set. On the other hand, in the case of winning the “big hit D1” in the special symbol 2 lottery, an open pattern is set in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 5 seconds. Therefore, when winning the "big hit D1" in the lottery of special symbol 1, in many cases, the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the big hit end, and the low probability state of 100 times of the ordinary symbol is set . On the other hand, when winning a "big hit D1" in the lottery of special symbol 2, in many cases, a high probability state of 12 special symbols is set after the big hit end, and a high probability state of normal symbols is set .

  When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 98, 99, the number of rounds of the jackpot becomes “jacks D2” (15R length open jackpot) of 15 rounds. As with "big hit A2", "big hit B2", and "big hit C2", regardless of whether it is a lottery of special symbol 1 or a lottery of special symbol 2 when it is elected to "big jack D2", An opening pattern is set in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 5 seconds. Therefore, when the "big hit D2" is won, in many cases, the high probability state of the special symbol of 12 times is set after the end of the big hit, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, when it becomes a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 2, regardless of the big hit type, in the second round of the big hit, the specified winning opening 650a is relatively long ( Open for 5 seconds) If it is possible to win the ball to the specific winning opening 650a, the high probability state of the special symbol is set based on the end of the jackpot, so in many cases, if it becomes a jackpot by lottery of the special symbol 2, the jackpot The high probability state of the special symbol is set based on the end of.

  On the other hand, in the second round of the jackpot, a half of the jackpots in the special symbol 1 lottery result in the jackpot (“jackpot A1”), where the specific winning opening 650a is opened for a very short time (0.5 seconds) The jackpot B1 ', the jackpot C1', and the jackpot D1)). Therefore, when it becomes these jackpots in the special symbol 1 lottery, it becomes difficult to win the ball to the specific winning opening 650a, so in many cases, the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot end Ru. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to win the jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery as compared to the special symbol 1 lottery.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, in rounds other than the second round of the jackpot, a display (right-handed navi) prompting to launch the ball to the right to display the ball in the specified winning opening 65a is displayed. Be done. Further, since at least three rounds of jackpots according to this modification are given, the player has more opportunities to aim at the right side of the game board 13. Thus, during the jackpot, the opportunity to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 provided directly above the specific winning opening 65a is the opportunity to enter the ball into the first entrance 64. It will be more than that. Furthermore, in this modification, when the holding balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are present, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed. Therefore, since the lottery of the special symbol 2 is given priority in the special variation period after the big hit end, when winning a big hit in the special variation period, the chance of becoming a big hit is increased by the lottery of the special symbol 2 . Therefore, since the jackpot and the high probability state of the special symbol can be easily repeated (that is, the frequency with which jackpots are started again is increased through pseudo-interval effect executed after the end of the jackpot), the game Can increase the sense of expectation that the jackpot will continue for a long time.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, two specific winning openings (specific winning opening 65a and specific winning opening 650a) are provided, and the ball is hit to the specific winning opening 650a during a big hit. In addition, it is configured to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit end. Thereby, it can be made easy to visually understand whether it transfers to the high probability state of a special symbol. In addition, since it is possible for the player to devise a timing etc. to launch the ball, if the player can enter the ball into the specified winning opening 650a, he has acquired a high probability state of special symbol by himself. As a result, the player can feel a sense of satisfaction and accomplishment.

  In addition, it is configured that the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 650a differs depending on whether the special symbol 1 is a big hit or the special symbol 2 is a big hit, and the special symbol 2 is a big hit In this case, it is configured to be advantageous to the player (ie, there are many opportunities to enter the ball into the specific winning opening 650a). Furthermore, in this modification, when the holding balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are present, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed. Therefore, since the lottery of the special symbol 2 is given priority in the special variation period after the big hit end, when winning a big hit in the special variation period, the chance of becoming a big hit is increased by the lottery of the special symbol 2 . Therefore, since the jackpot and the high probability state of the special symbol can be easily repeated (that is, the frequency with which jackpots are started again is increased through pseudo-interval effect executed after the end of the jackpot), the game Can increase the sense of expectation that the jackpot will continue for a long time.

  In addition, since the specific winning hole 650a is disposed at the lower left of the first entry hole 64, the player wins the specific winning hole 650a in the round (second round) in which the specific winning hole 650a is opened. The ball launched for the purpose of winning is likely to be awarded to the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, in the second round, the holding ball of the special symbol 1 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the special variation period set after the end of the jackpot, it is possible to make it difficult for the situation that the number of holding balls does not exist and the variation is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the continuation of the pseudo interval effect without the end of the special variation period, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  Also, when the pseudo-interval effect is ended in a predetermined time (10 seconds) regardless of whether or not eight variation pattern effects have been executed in the special variation period, a state of no variation (variation pattern As the effect is not executed and the state in which the holding ball does not exist is more likely to occur, the number of drawing times of the special symbol executed during the pseudo interval effect decreases. Therefore, the possibility of becoming a big hit again becomes low after pseudo interval production. On the other hand, in the present modification, as described above, since the ball easily enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 in the big hit, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are retained. The ball number is configured to be the largest. Therefore, since it can suppress that it will be in a state of no fluctuation during pseudo | simulation interval production, the possibility of becoming a big hit again can be raised through pseudo | simulation interval production. Therefore, the appearance of the player can be made to feel as if the jackpot state has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In this modification, compared to the lottery of the special symbol 1, when it became a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 2, it was configured to be more likely to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol Not limited to this. For example, the lottery of the special symbol 1 may be configured to be more likely to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol when becoming a big hit. As described above, in the third embodiment and the modification of the third embodiment, when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set after the end of the jackpot, the first entry is continued until the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is ended. An indication to urge the ball to enter the ball opening 64 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, it is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol which is disadvantageous for the player that the lottery of the special symbol 1 is mainly executed. Therefore, when it is difficult to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol when it becomes a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 1, the low probability state of the special symbol is repeated endlessly, cutting the player's motivation for the game. There is a risk of Therefore, lowering the player's motivation can be suppressed by increasing the possibility of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol when the jackpot of the special symbol 1 is achieved.

  In this modification, the specified winning opening 650a is configured to be opened for 0.5 seconds or 5 seconds in the second round, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be opened in the first round or the third round, or may be configured to be opened in a plurality of rounds. Moreover, you may comprise so that the round open | released only by one part of jackpots may be provided. For example, it may be configured to provide a round in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened only at "big hit D1" and "big hit D2". Furthermore, the open period of the specific winning opening 650a is not limited to the aspect of this modification, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, 1 second and 10 seconds may be provided as the open period.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75, a pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the variation pattern is selected such that the variation period is fixed for each drawing number of the special symbol in the special variation period. More specifically, if the drawing of the special symbol performed for the first time or the second time after the end of the jackpot is out, the fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation A) with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is selected, and the jackpot When the lottery of the special symbol performed for the third time or the fourth time after the end is out, the fluctuation pattern of 1 second is selected, and the special symbol performed for the fifth time to the eighth time after the big hit end If the lottery is out of the drawing, the fluctuation pattern of 0.5 seconds is selected to be selected. By configuring in this manner, the time required to execute the fluctuation pattern effect causing the deviation a predetermined number of times (eight times in the first embodiment) is configured to be the fixed time (8 seconds). In addition, when the big hit is over until the drawing of the special symbol is performed 8 times after the big hit ends, the fluctuation time is according to the remaining predetermined number of times (the remaining time until the predetermined time) (for example, the first time The special fluctuation period is configured to be a fixed time (8 seconds) by setting 8 seconds in the case and 6 seconds in the second case. In other words, in order to set the special variation period to a predetermined time (8 seconds) in all the lottery numbers, it was necessary to prepare a variation pattern as a jackpot with different variation time according to all the variation numbers.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the fluctuation of the fixed fluctuation period according to whether or not the lottery result and the lottery result of the holding area (pre-reading result) for each drawing number of the special symbol in the special fluctuation period The pattern effect is configured to be selected. In this way, the variation pattern effect that becomes the big hit and the variation pattern effect that is out of the point when the lottery result (pre-reading result) of the big hit can be determined, according to the remaining predetermined number of times (remaining time up to the predetermined time) The presentation time can be set. Therefore, since the type of the presentation time of the fluctuation pattern presentation which becomes the jackpot can be reduced, the capacity of the ROM 234 can be saved. In addition, regardless of whether or not the jackpot occurs in the middle of the special fluctuation period, it is possible to gradually reduce the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed a plurality of times in one special fluctuation period. Here, in the first embodiment, in the case of a big hit during the special variation period, a variation pattern having a variation time longer than that of the variation pattern effect executed one time before, except in the case of a big win in the eighth lottery. The composition was configured to be selected. For this reason, the player may be able to recognize that the jackpot has been made in the middle of the special fluctuation period by executing the fluctuation pattern effect with a long fluctuation time during the special fluctuation period, and the interval effect from There was a risk that it could not be enjoyed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the jackpot occurs in the middle of the special fluctuation period, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern effect can be decreased as the number of lottery times of the special symbol increases. It can be hard to predict whether or not a jackpot by time. Therefore, since it is difficult to predict in advance the result of the pseudo interval effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the configuration in that the contents of the special variation pattern selection table 202e of the ROM 202 are changed in the main control device 110. is there. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 It is identical to the pachinko machine 10 in form. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the special variation pattern selection table 202e according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing the special variation pattern selection table 202e. The special variation pattern selection table 202e is a data table for determining the variation time during the special variation period, as in the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 74, in the special variation pattern selection table 202e in the fourth embodiment, whether or not the drawing number of the special symbol after the end of the big hit, and the drawing result that becomes the big hit for the starting ball or the holding ball exist The fluctuation time during the special fluctuation period is specified accordingly. In the special variation pattern selection table 202e, when there is a big hit holding ball, the big hit fluctuation of the holding ball and the holding ball that displays the fluctuation of the out until the fluctuation of the holding ball is executed. The fluctuation period is configured to be a fixed time (8 seconds).

  This will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 shows the correspondence relationship between the state of the fluctuation effect, the jackpot effect, and the specific winning opening that is executed during the pseudo interval effect that is executed after the end of the jackpot. FIG. 75 (a) is a view showing the case where the third win of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot will be a big hit, and FIG. 75 (b) is the seventh special symbol after the end of the jackpot. It is the figure which showed the case where it becomes a big hit by lottery of. For example, when the jackpot becomes the big win in the third lottery of special symbols after the jackpot is completed, ie, when the lottery of the special symbol is performed for the first time after the end of the jackpot, the lottery result stored in the reserved second area is When it is determined in advance that the jackpot is a jackpot, the special fluctuation F having a fluctuation time of 4 seconds is selected as the mode of the fluctuation pattern effect to be executed at the first time. In addition, when the execution of the special variation F ends and the data of the reserved first area is shifted to the execution area (that is, when the lottery timing of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot), the reserved first area becomes Since a jackpot state occurs, a special fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is selected. Further, in the special symbol lottery executed for the third time after the end of the big hit, the data of the execution area becomes the lottery result indicating the big hit, so the special variation A with a variation time of 2 seconds is selected (FIG. 75) (A).

  As another case, when it becomes a big hit in the seventh special symbol lottery after the big hit ends, in the first to third special symbol lottery to be executed, there is no information indicating the big hit in the holding ball . Therefore, the special fluctuation A (2 seconds) is selected for the first and second times, and the special fluctuation B (1 second) is selected for the third time. In the fourth to seventh modes, the variation pattern effect mode is executed for the fourth time with the fourth probability change and with the third hold, the fifth with the fifth definite change with the second hold and the sixth with the definite change As the number of times is 6 and hold 1 is hit, and the number 7 of probability change is 7 and start is hit, the 4th and 5th special fluctuation B (1 second), and the 6th and 7th special fluctuation C (0, 5 seconds) is selected (FIG. 75 (b)).

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the period from the end of the jackpot to the start of the next jackpot is 8 seconds, and the type of the presentation time of the fluctuation pattern effect is 7 of the special fluctuations A to G Compared to the type-necessary first embodiment, it is possible to configure the type of effect time with five types of special variations A to D and F. In addition, it is possible to make sure that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed a plurality of times in one special fluctuation period is gradually reduced.

  Therefore, the types of various tables such as the display data table according to the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern can be reduced compared to the first embodiment, and the capacity of the ROM 234 can be saved. In addition, the player can recognize that the jackpot in the middle of the special fluctuation period becomes long by the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display becoming long in the first embodiment, and the player for the last effect of the special fluctuation period The interest of the player in the game can be improved without causing the problem that the interest of the player may be lowered.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84, a pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the payout speed of the winning balls is configured to be constant. That is, in the case of executing payout balls, the configuration is such that the payout is paused for 1 second every time 10 payout balls are continuously paid out by the payout motor 216 (a payout suspension period of 1 second is set). . In addition, the rotational speed of the payout motor 216 is set such that the time required for the payout motor 216 to dispense ten winning balls is one second.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the payout speed of the winning balls is configured to be different according to the number of rounds. Specifically, the payout speed of the winning balls (the rotation speed of the payout motor 216) is set to be slower as the number of rounds advances, and the period in which the winning balls are paid out in the second half of the jackpot is lengthened. In this way, the prize balls are paid out little by little even during the pseudo-interval effect after the jackpot is finished, and the player's awareness can be directed to the payout of the prize balls during the pseudo-interval effect. . That is, by suppressing concentration of the player's consciousness on the pseudo interval effect, it is more difficult to distinguish between the interval effect during the big hit and the pseudo interval effect after the end of the big hit.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration in that a payout speed selection table 202g is added to the ROM 202 in the main control unit 110, and the RAM 203 In that the payout counter 203 n is added, the partial process included in the main process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is different, and the MPU 211 of the payout control unit 111 executes The various processes to be performed are different. The other configurations, other processes executed by the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are described in the first embodiment. Are identical to the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fifth Embodiment
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. FIG. 76A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 76A, the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment is provided with a payout rate selection table 202g in addition to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 77, the payout rate selection table 202g is referred to set the rotational speed (dispense rate) of the payout motor 216 in the case of delivering the prize ball in each round of the jackpot. Data table. By referring to the payout rate selection table 202g, it is possible to slow the payout rate of the prize balls in the second half of the jackpot. Therefore, since the payout of the prize ball in the jackpot is continued after the jackpot (that is, in the pseudo-interval presentation), the player's consciousness can be directed to the payout of the prize ball during the pseudo-interval presentation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress concentration of the player's consciousness on the pseudo-interval effect, so it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect during the big hit and the pseudo-interval effect after the big hit ends.

  FIG. 76 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 76B, the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment is provided with a payout counter 203 n in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. The payout counter 203 n is a counter updated according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. In this embodiment, the payout speed of the winning balls is varied based on the value of the payout counter 203n and the contents of the above-mentioned payout speed selection table 202g. If the value of the payout counter 203 n is 0, it indicates the normal state other than the big hit state or the state of the first round of the big hit. Then, each time the jackpot round progresses, the value of the payout counter 203 n is incremented by one. That is, the value of the payout counter 203 n is a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of rounds of the jackpot. The value of the payout counter 203n is cleared to 0 at the end of the jackpot (see S1242 in FIG. 80). In addition, in the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 30), 0 is also set when initializing the RAM 203 (see S1014 in FIG. 30).

  Next, the payout rate selection table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the payout speed selection table 202g is a data table that is referred to in order to set the rotational speed (dispensing speed) of the payout motor 216 when paying out the winning balls in each round of the jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 77, in the dispensing speed selection table 202g, the rotational speed (dispensing speed) of the dispensing motor 216 is defined in association with the value of the dispensing counter 203n. Specifically, when the value of the payout counter 203 n is 0 (that is, in the first round of the big hit or the normal state), the normal speed is set as the rotational speed (the payout speed) of the payout motor 216 ( 10 prize balls are paid out per second). Also, if the value of the payout counter 203 n is 1 (that is, if it is the second round of the big hit), “low speed 1” as the rotational speed (dispensing speed) of the payout motor 216, that is, eight awards per second The speed at which the balls are paid out is set. In addition, if the value of the payout counter 203n is 2 (that is, in the third round of the big hit), the rotational speed (dispensing speed) of the payout motor 216 is "low speed 2", that is, six per second. The speed at which the prize balls are paid out is set. On the other hand, if the value of the payout counter 203n is 3 to 14 (that is, after the fourth round of the big hit), the rotational speed (dispensing speed) of the payout motor 216 is "low speed 3", that is, 5 per second. The speed at which individual winning balls are paid out is set.

  In this way, as the jackpot round progresses, the speed at which the balls are paid out gradually decreases, so the payout of the balls during the jackpot is after the jackpot (that is, the pseudo-interval presentation Medium) will be continued. Therefore, during the pseudo-interval effect, the player's consciousness can be directed to the payout of the winning balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress concentration of the player's consciousness on the pseudo-interval effect, so it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect during the big hit and the pseudo-interval effect after the big hit ends. In addition, even if it does not become a jackpot after pseudo-interval production, by continuing to be paid out the prize balls, it is possible for the player to be immersed in the aftermath of the previous jackpot, disappointing that the jackpot did not continue It can reduce the feeling. The payout speed is not limited to the value defined in the payout speed selection table 202g of the present embodiment, and can be set arbitrarily. Further, the variation of the payout rate is not limited to four types (normal speed, low speed 1, low speed 2 and low speed 3). For example, the number of variations may be smaller than in the present embodiment, such as setting the payout rate to two types. Further, for example, variations may be increased as compared with the present embodiment, such as setting the payout rate to 10 types.

<About control processing of main controller in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various processing executed by the MPU of the main control apparatus 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. First, FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the fifth embodiment. As described above, this main process is a process of executing main control of the game in a cycle of 4 ms.

  Among the main processes, in the processes of S1101 to S1103 and S1105 to S1116, the same processes as the processes of S1101 to S1103 and S1105 to S1116 in the main process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment are performed. To be executed. Then, in the main processing in the fifth embodiment, when the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read in the processing of S1103, the payout command setting processing is then executed (S1141), and further Instead of the jackpot control process (S1104) in the first embodiment, a jackpot control process 4 (S1141) is executed. Details of the payout command setting process (S1141) and the jackpot control process 4 (S1142) will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80.

  First, the above-mentioned payout command setting process will be described with reference to FIG. The payout command setting process is a process for setting a payout command for causing the payout control device 111 to pay out the winning balls. The payout command is set to include information indicating the rotational speed (dispensing speed) of the payout motor 216. The payout control device 111 executes payout of the prize balls based on the information indicating the number of prize balls and the information indicating the rotation speed (dispensing speed) of the payout motor 216 based on the payout command.

  In the payout command setting process (see FIG. 79), first, it is determined whether there is any winning information (S4201). Here, the winning information includes winning information for the first ball entry port 64 and the normal ball entry port 67, in addition to the ball winning for the specific winning hole 65a. If it is determined in the process of S4201 that there is no winning information (S4201: No), this process is ended and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 78).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning information exists in the process of S4201 (S4201: Yes), then, there is the winning information indicating the winning to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a in the winning information. It is determined whether or not (S4202). Then, when it is determined that there is winning information indicating winning in the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a (S4202: Yes), the value of the payout counter 202n is read out and the prescribed contents of the payout rate selection table 202g By comparison, the rotational speed (dispensing speed) of the payout motor 216 at the time of payout of the current winning ball is specified (S 4203). Then, a payout command including the information indicating the specified payout speed and the information indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out is set (S4204), and the process is ended.

  In the process of S4202, there is no winning information indicating winning in the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a (that is, only the first entering slot 64 or the winning information for the normal entering slot 67 is present). When it is determined (S4202: No), it includes information indicating the payout speed corresponding to the normal speed (that is, the payout speed at which ten prize balls are paid out in one second), and information indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out. A cash out command is set (S4205), and this processing ends. The payout command set by the processing of S4204 or S4205 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 78) executed by the MPU 201. Are sent to the payout control device 111. When receiving the payout command, the payout control device 111 extracts information indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out from the payout command and information indicating the payout speed, and executes payout based on the extracted information.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the above-described jackpot control process 4 will be described. In the big hit control process 4 (see FIG. 80), the big hit control process 3 is the same as the big hit control process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 32), the opening and closing of the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a in the big hit. Or setting a round number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the start of a new round.

  In the respective processes of S1201 to S1210 in the jackpot control process 4, the same processes as the respective processes of S1201 to S1210 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, in the jackpot control process 4 in the fifth embodiment, it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1202), the opening setting of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a (S1203), the setting of the round number command When (S1204) is performed, 1 is added to the value of the payout counter 203n (S1241), the present process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 78). By updating the value of the payout counter 203 n at the start timing of a new round, the payout speed can be set to the speed corresponding to each round from the beginning of each round.

  In the big hit control process 4 of the present embodiment, the end of the big hit is set (S1208), and the values after the big hit are set in various counters (the positive change counter 203e, the hour reduction short counter 203f, and the special change on counter 203g). (S1209) Then, the value of the payout counter 203n is reset by setting it to 0 (S1242), and this processing is ended.

<About control processing of the payout control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various types of processing executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing main processing of the payout control device 111. This main process is started by power-on reset.

  In this main process, first, an initialization process associated with power on is executed (S4301). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value determined in advance, and an interrupt mode is set. Next, the process waits for reception of the payout permission command transmitted from the main control device 110 (S4302: No). When the payout permission command is received (S4302: Yes), the RAM access is permitted (S4303), and the external interrupt vector is set (S4304).

  Thereafter, data backup processing is performed on the RAM 213 in the MPU 211. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4305), and if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4305: Yes), processing is performed to clear (delete) the backup data. Migrate to On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S4305: No), it is further judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power shutoff is stored in the backup area of the RAM 213 (S4306), and if not stored (S4306) No: Since backup data is not stored, the process proceeds to S4315 also in this case. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the backup area (S4306: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S4307), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S4308: No), that is, calculated If the RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S4315. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 213. Instead of the RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 213 is correctly stored.

  In the process after S4315, the initialization process of the RAM 213 is executed. In this initialization process, first, the use area of the RAM 213 is cleared to 0 (S4315), and an initial value of the RAM 213 is set (S4316). Thereafter, the MPU 211 peripheral devices are initialized (S4317), and an interrupt is permitted (S4318), and the process shifts to a payout control process described later.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 has not been pressed (S4305: No), the occurrence information of power shutoff is set (S4306: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal. (S4308: Yes), the processing at the time of power recovery (processing at the time of power shutoff recovery) is executed. That is, the stack pointer at the time of power shutoff is restored (S4309), and the power shutoff occurrence information is cleared (S4310). In addition, the MPU 211 peripheral devices are initialized (S4311), and the use register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 213 (S4312). Furthermore, before the power is turned off, it is checked whether or not the interrupt has been enabled (S4313). If the interrupt is enabled (S4313: Yes), the interrupt is allowed (S4314), while the interrupt is disabled when the power is turned off. If it is in the state (S4313: No), the processing is returned to the address before the power-off while the interrupt is inhibited.

  Next, the above-described payout control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This payout control process is executed following the main process (see FIG. 81) of the payout control device 111, and is a process for setting the payout of the winning balls and the rental balls. In this payout control process, first, a command from the main control device 110 is obtained, the total number of winning balls is stored (S4401), and then the emission control is set to the emission control device 112 (S4402) ). Then, the state of the state recovery switch is checked, and when the state recovery switch is pressed, the state recovery operation is executed (S4403). Here, the state recovery switch is a switch for causing the dispensing motor 216 to perform a state recovery operation when a store clerk or the like in the hall presses when a dispensing error such as ball clogging occurs. Specifically, when the state recovery switch is pressed, the payout motor 216 rotates in the opposite direction to the normal direction as a state recovery operation so that the ball clogging is eliminated (that is, recovery to the normal state). It is configured.

  Thereafter, in accordance with the change of the state of the lower tray unit 15, the setting of the lower lower tray full state or the lower lower tray full release state is executed (S4404). That is, the full tray condition of the lower tray unit 15 is judged by the detection signal of the lower tray full tank switch, and when the lower tray full is reached, the setting of the lower tray full condition is executed and the lower tray full is lost. At the same time, execute the setup of the bottom plate release state. Further, in accordance with the change of the state of the tank ball, the setting of the tank ball non-existent state or the tank ball non-released state is executed (S4405). That is, the tank ball absence state is determined by the detection signal of the tank ball absence switch, and the tank sphere absence state is executed when the tank sphere absence is reached, and the tank sphere absence state released when the tank sphere absence is eliminated. Execute the setting. Thereafter, the presence or absence of a state to be notified is determined, and when there is a state to be notified, notification is performed by the 7-segment LED provided in the payout control device 111 (S4406).

  Next, the processing for paying out the winning balls is executed by the processing of S4407 to S4409. That is, if the prize balls are not dispensable and the total number of prize balls stored in the process of S4401 is not 0 (S4407: No, S4408: No), the prize ball control process is started (S4409). On the other hand, if the prize balls can not be paid out (S4407: Yes) or the total number of prize balls is 0 (S4408: Yes), the processing shifts to a process for paying out the rental balls. The prize ball control process (S4409) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing for paying out the rental balls of S4410 to S4412, if the rental balls are not in a non-disclaimable state and the rental ball payout request from the card unit has been received (S4410: No, S4411: Yes), the rental The ball control process (S4412) is started. On the other hand, if the lending balls can not be paid out (S4410: Yes) or the rental ball dispensing request has not been received (S4411: No), the subsequent ball removal processing is executed (S4413). The rental ball control process (S4412) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the ball removal processing (S4413), the payout motor 216 is driven to execute the ball removal processing under the condition that the state recovery switch is not checked and the ball removal impossible state is not started and the ball removal operation is not started (S4413). Subsequently, control (vibrator motor control) of a vibrator provided on the tank rail is executed under the condition that the ball is clogged (S4414). Specifically, when a ball clogging occurs in the vicinity of the tank rail, vibration is applied to the tank rail by driving the vibrator to eliminate the ball clogging. Thereafter, the process returns to the top of the payout control process, and thereafter, the above-described processes of S4401 to S4414 are repeatedly executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the aforementioned winning ball control process will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this winning ball payout processing. In this prize ball payout processing, first, the rotational speed of the payout motor 216 is driven at a speed based on the payout command output from the main control device 110, and payout of the prize balls is executed (S4501). Next, it is determined whether the rotation of the payout motor 216 is normal or not based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor (S4502). If it is not normal (S4502: No), the payout motor 216 is driven to perform retry processing. And the stop processing of the payout motor 216 is executed (S4503), and the present processing is ended to return to the payout control processing (see FIG. 82).

  If it is determined that the rotation of the payout motor 216 is normal (S4502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming ball is normally counted based on the detection result of the payout count switch (S4504). Then, when it is determined that the count of the gaming balls is not normal (S4504: No), the payout motor 216 is driven to execute the retry processing and the payout motor 216 is stopped (S4505), and the main processing is performed. The process ends and returns to the payout control process (see FIG. 82).

  Furthermore, if it is determined that the count of gaming balls is normal as a result of the processing of S4504 (S4504: Yes), whether or not the count number of gaming balls by the payout count switch has reached the total number of winning balls (ie, It is judged whether or not the payout of the winning balls instructed by the payout command is completed (S4506), and if the payout is completed (S4506: Yes), stop processing of the payout motor 216 is executed (S4507), The present process ends, and the process returns to the payout control process (see FIG. 82). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4506 that the payout of the winning balls has not been completed (S4506: No), this process is ended and the process returns to the payout control process (see FIG. 82).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the above-mentioned rental ball control process will be described. FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing this rental ball control process. In the rental ball control process, first, the payout motor 216 is driven to execute payout of the rental balls (S4601). Next, it is determined whether the rotation of the payout motor 216 is normal according to the detection result of the payout rotation sensor (S4602), and when it is not normal (S4602: No), the payout motor 216 is driven to execute retry processing. At the same time, the processing for stopping the payout motor 216 is executed (S4603), and this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the payout control processing (see FIG. 82).

  If it is determined in the process of S4602 that the payout motor 216 is rotating normally (S4602: Yes), it is determined whether the gaming ball is normally counted based on the detection result of the payout count switch. (S4604). When it is determined in the process of S4604 that the count of the gaming balls is not normal (S4604: No), the payout motor 216 is driven to execute retry processing and the payout motor 216 is stopped (S1205). ), And ends this processing and returns to the payout control processing (see FIG. 82).

  Furthermore, in the process of S4604, when it is determined that the count of gaming balls is normal (S4604: Yes), the count number of gaming balls by the payout count switch reaches a predetermined number of lent balls (25) and payout is made. It is determined whether or not it has been completed (S4606), and if the payout has been completed (S4606: Yes), stop processing of the payout motor 216 is executed (S4607), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4606 that the payout of the predetermined number of held balls (25) is not completed (S4606: No), this process is ended as it is.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, as the jackpot round progresses, the rotational speed (the payout speed) of the payout motor 216 driven to pay out the winning balls is configured to be slower. There is. As a result, since it is possible to extend the time during which the jackpot prize balls are paid out, it is possible to continue paying out the prize balls even after the jackpot is finished (that is, during pseudo-interval effect). Therefore, during the pseudo-interval effect, the player's consciousness can be directed to the payout of the winning balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress concentration of the player's consciousness on the pseudo-interval effect, so it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect during the big hit and the pseudo-interval effect after the big hit ends. In addition, even if it does not become a jackpot after pseudo-interval production, by continuing to be paid out the prize balls, it is possible for the player to be immersed in the aftermath of the previous jackpot, disappointing that the jackpot did not continue It can reduce the feeling.

  In the present embodiment, by reducing the rotational speed of the payout motor 216, the number of prize balls that can be dispensed per second is reduced (that is, it takes to dispense the prize balls). Time was extended), but it is not limited to this. For example, the payment speed may be reduced by increasing the frequency of the payment suspension period. Specifically, for example, although a one-second payout suspension period is set which is set every time ten winning balls are paid out normally, as the number of rounds of the jackpot advances, the payout of eight winning balls is performed. A payout suspension period may be set for each or every payout of five prize balls. Further, as the number of rounds advances, the payout suspension period may be extended.

  In the present embodiment, the payout speed is always reduced every round up to the third round, and is set to the slowest "low speed 3" of the payout speed after the third round, but is limited thereto is not. For example, at the start of each round, a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to slow the payout rate, and the payout rate may be randomly slowed down. Further, the payout rate may be increased or decreased according to the number of rounds. For example, if "big hit D (15 rounds big hit)" with a large number of rounds continues, most of the winning balls will be paid out at the slowest payout rate (low speed 3). For this reason, even after the jackpot and the pseudo interval effect end and the normal fluctuation pattern effect is executed, the payout balls may continue to be executed endlessly. In this case, there is a possibility that the player may feel anxious feeling that there is a problem in the payout control of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, for example, in the fifth round to the twelfth round of "big hit D", it is configured to return to the normal payout rate, and in the thirteenth round to the fifteenth round, it is configured to slow the payout rate one step at a time again. May be In addition, in the middle round (for example, 5 rounds or 10 rounds) in the middle of “big hit D”, the delivery speed may be configured to be faster than the normal speed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the payout balls from being continuously executed even after the normal variation pattern presentation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from being mistakenly identified as having a problem in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, although the payout speed is slowed at the start of each round of the jackpot, the trigger for changing the payout speed is not limited to this. For example, in each round, the payout speed may be varied based on the number of times the ball has won the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. For example, when the ball wins to the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a at the first to seventh times, the winning balls are paid out at the normal speed, and the ball reaches the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a at the eighth time. If you win a prize, set the payout speed to "low speed 1" and pay out the winning balls, and if the ball wins to the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a at the ninth time, the payout speed is " If you set the low speed 2 "and pay out the winning balls, and the ball wins to the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a at the 10th time, set the payout speed to" low 3 "and pay out the winning balls May be configured to Thus, in one round period, the payout speed can be reduced toward the second half of the period, so that the winning balls can be paid out also during the interval period after the end of each round or during the pseudo-interval effect. Therefore, during the pseudo-interval effect, the player's consciousness can be directed to the payout of the winning balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress concentration of the player's consciousness on the pseudo-interval effect, so it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect performed during the big hit and the pseudo-interval effect after the big hit ends. In addition, even if it does not become a jackpot after pseudo-interval production, by continuing to be paid out the prize balls, it is possible for the player to be immersed in the aftermath of the previous jackpot, disappointing that the jackpot did not continue It can reduce the feeling.

  In addition, the payout speed of the winning balls to be paid out based on the winning of the ball to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, other ball entrance (the first ball entrance 64, the normal ball entrance 67, etc. The ball may be configured to be slower than the payout rate of the prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of the ball and to keep the prize balls being paid out even during the special fluctuation period. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to direct the player's consciousness to the winning balls to be paid out, so it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the pseudo interval effect and the interval effect during the jackpot. In addition, even if it does not become a jackpot after pseudo-interval production, by continuing to be paid out the prize balls, it is possible for the player to be immersed in the aftermath of the previous jackpot, disappointing that the jackpot did not continue It can reduce the feeling. In addition, since the payout of the winning balls is increased during the jackpot, excessive heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed by reducing the payout speed in the second half of the jackpot.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, although it comprised so that a delivery speed might become slow as a round advances uniformly in all the big hit, it is not restricted to this. For example, when the pre-reading is performed during the jackpot and it is determined that the drawing result which is the jackpot is held, the payout speed of the prize ball is decreased, and the prize ball continues to be paid out during the pseudo interval effect after the jackpot It may be configured as follows. In this way, in the pseudo-interval effect to be executed between the present jackpot and the next jackpot, the player's awareness can be directed to the payout of the prize ball, so that the jackpot has been ended once It can be hard to notice. Therefore, since it can be felt that the jackpot has continued for a long time, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. On the contrary, in the pre-reading during the jackpot, while the lottery result for the jackpot is not held, the payout speed is reduced each time the round advances, and it is determined that the jackpot result for the jackpot is held. The delivery speed may be configured to be set to the normal speed (or a speed higher than the normal speed). If the lottery result that becomes the big hit during the big hit is not held, there is a possibility that the end of the big hit is notified as a result of the pseudo interval effect. In this case, if the payout speed of the winning balls is reduced so that the winning balls are continuously paid out even after the end of the jackpot is notified, the player may be allowed to dip into the aftermath of the previous jackpot. It can be done and relieve the feeling of disappointment that the jackpot did not continue. On the other hand, when a jackpot is to be made again via the pseudo interval effect, a large amount of prize balls will be paid out also at the next jackpot, so the time required to pay out the prize balls may be prolonged. In other words, there is a risk that the payout of the winning balls will continue to be performed for a long time after the repetition of the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect is completed (that is, during the normal variation pattern effect execution). There is a possibility that the machine 10 may be mistaken as having a problem. Therefore, when it is determined that the lottery result to be a big hit is held, the payout speed is set to the normal speed (or a speed higher than the normal speed), so that the award is endlessly performed during the execution of the normal fluctuation pattern effect. It can be suppressed that the delivery of the ball continues to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from being mistakenly identified as having a problem in the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, in the first round of the jackpot, the payout speed of the winning balls may be configured to be faster than the normal speed (for example, the speed at which 15 winning balls are paid out per second). This makes it possible to secure the ball used for the big hit game more quickly, so that it is possible to lose the ball during the big hit game and to prevent the situation where the player can not play the big hit game. can do. Therefore, it is possible to further entertain the player during the jackpot game. In the case of a big hit via pseudo-interval effect (that is, a big hit again in a short period after the previous big hit ends), set the payout rate for the first round to the normal speed, When the jackpot is newly made a jackpot without passing through the pseudo interval effect, the payout speed may be increased. In the case of a big hit via pseudo-interval effect, the player has already secured a sufficient number of balls for use in the big hit game, since the big hit is continuously made in a short period from the end of the previous big hit. It is because Also, if the payout speed is always increased in the first round, the player can recognize the difference in the payout speed in the jackpot via the pseudo interval effect, and can recognize whether or not the current is the first round. There is a risk of In the present embodiment, since there is no jackpot of the number of rounds of two or less, if it is recognized that the present is the first round, it is indicated that the continuation of the jackpot is suggested in at least two subsequent interval effects. It can be recognized. That is, since the result of the interval effect for two times can be predicted first, it is not possible to enjoy the interval effect for the two times. On the other hand, if the payout rate in the first round is set as the normal speed when the jackpot is achieved via the pseudo interval effect, it is recognized whether the player is in the first round of the new jackpot. It can be difficult to do. Therefore, in each interval production, it is possible to check carefully whether or not the jackpot continues. Therefore, the player can be entertained in each interval presentation.

  In this embodiment, the information indicating the number of winning balls and the information indicating the rotational speed of the dispensing motor 216 are included in the dispensing command, but the dispensing command is information indicating the payout of one winning sphere. It may be configured. For example, when 15 payout balls are to be paid out, the payout command may be output 15 times continuously. In addition, each time the round of the jackpot progresses, the number of payout commands that can be output per second may be reduced (the interval at which the payout command is output may be extended). For example, in the first round of the jackpot, a maximum of 10 dispensing commands can be output per second, and in the second round, the maximum of 8 dispensing commands can be output per second, and in the third round Alternatively, it may be configured to output six dispensing commands per second, and may be configured to output five dispensing commands per second after the fourth round. This makes it possible to delay the time from the start of the payout of the winning balls to the end thereof, so that the payout of the winning balls can be performed even during the pseudo-interval effect. Therefore, since the player's awareness can be directed to the winning balls to be paid out, it is possible to suppress gaze at the pseudo interval effect. Therefore, it can be made more difficult to distinguish between pseudo-interval presentation and interval presentation during a big hit.

  In the present embodiment, the information indicating the number of winning balls and the information indicating the rotational speed of the dispensing motor 216 are included in the dispensing command, but only the information indicating the number of winning balls is included in the dispensing command. The payout control device 111 may be configured to vary the rotational speed of the payout motor 216. Specifically, for example, depending on the frequency of a payout command (a payout command corresponding to 15 winning balls) based on the ball winning on the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, whether the present time is in a round or not The number of rounds may be determined by determining whether the number is medium, and the payout speed of the winning balls may be reduced based on the determined number of rounds. Also, for example, when the payout ball payout command is continuously output and the payout of the prize ball corresponding to the newly output payout command is suspended, that is, it is output earlier in time. When the payout balls corresponding to the newly output payout command are stocked because the payout balls corresponding to the payout command continue, the payout speed is configured to be reduced. You may Further, in this case, the payout speed may be varied based on the number of unpaid prize balls stocked. For example, when the number of unpaid award balls is ten, the payout speed may be set to be slower than the normal speed (for example, set to low speed 1). For example, when the number of unpaid prize balls is 30, the payout speed is set to low speed 2, and when the number of unpaid prize balls is 50, the payout speed is low 3. It may be configured to be set to As described above, by changing the payout speed by the payout control device 111, it is possible to reduce the type of payout command output from the main control device 110. In addition, the processing load of the main controller 110 during the jackpot can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load of the main controller 110 during the jackpot increases, and the closing timing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is delayed, or conversely, the opening timing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as delay.

  Furthermore, a part of the unpaid prize balls stocked in the payout control device 111 may be held until the end of the jackpot, and the stock balls may be dispensed after the jackpot ends. As a result, since the award balls can be paid out even during the pseudo-interval effect, the player's awareness can be directed to the award balls to be paid out. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the pseudo interval effect and the interval effect during the big hit. It should be noted that the payout of the stock balls may be started when the jackpot ends, or may be configured to be paid out based on a predetermined opportunity. The predetermined trigger includes, for example, the timing at which the symbol is determined and displayed, and the timing at which the start winning is performed first after the end of the jackpot, in the fluctuation pattern effect executed first after the jackpot end.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the payout speed is changed for the pachinko machine 10 performing the pseudo-interval effect has been described, but the pay-out speed is variable for the gaming machine not having the function of the pseudo interval effect. You may configure it. Specifically, the payout rate may be reduced as the number of rounds of the jackpot progresses, so that the payout of the prize balls may continue for a certain period of time even after the end of the jackpot. As a result, the player can be immersed in the aftermath of the previous jackpot, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

Regarding Modification of Fifth Embodiment
Subsequently, a pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, by varying the rotational speed (dispensing speed) of the dispensing motor 216, the time period required to dispense the winning balls is varied. As a result, the winning balls of the jackpot are continued to be paid out during the pseudo-interval effect, and the player's awareness is directed to the winning balls to be paid out.

  On the other hand, in the present modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to output a signal to cause the pachinko machine 10 to stop and start the supply of the balls to the island facility that supplies the balls to the pachinko machine 10. And it controls to become difficult to be supplied with a ball from the island equipment side at the final stage of the big hit, and it is constituted so that a prize ball will be continuously paid out also in the pseudo interval production after the big hit end. As a result, as in the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the player's awareness can be directed to the payout of the winning balls during the pseudo-interval effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress concentration of the player's consciousness on the pseudo-interval effect, so it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect during the big hit and the pseudo-interval effect after the big hit ends. In addition, even if it does not become a jackpot after pseudo-interval production, by continuing to be paid out the prize balls, it is possible for the player to be immersed in the aftermath of the previous jackpot, disappointing that the jackpot did not continue It can reduce the feeling.

  The pachinko machine in this modification is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment in configuration in that the external output terminal plate 261 is electrically connected to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. In the main controller 110, the ball supply setting table 202h is provided in the ROM 202 instead of the payout speed selection table 202g, and the supply stop flag 203o, the stop period counter 203p, the supply period counter 203q in the RAM 203. Is added, the partial processing included in the main processing (see FIG. 78) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is different. The fifth embodiment will be described with respect to other configurations, other processes executed by the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114. Are identical to the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Modification of Fifth Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 85 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification. As shown in FIG. 85, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, in addition to the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment, an external output terminal 261 is provided. The external output terminal 261 is electrically connected to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111, and is used to output various information regarding the pachinko machine 10 to the outside. Here, various information about the pachinko machine 10 refers to information indicating whether or not the gaming machine is in a big hit, information on whether or not the special symbol is changing, information indicating the number of paid out balls, ball Information that indicates whether it is necessary to supply These pieces of information are output to an island facility or a hall computer via the external output terminal 261.

  The hall computer is configured to be able to grasp the ball-drawing rate of the pachinko machine 10 or to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is tampered with based on the information output via the external output terminal 261. In addition, the island facility performs ball supply or ball supply stop to the pachinko machine 10 based on the information output via the external output terminal 261. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 itself is also provided with a tank for storing balls, but since the number of balls that can be stored is small (for example, 150), a jackpot starts when the tank is full. Even if it is done, the ball stored in the tank in the middle of the jackpot is configured to be used up. Therefore, it is comprised so that it can pay out all the prize balls in a jackpot by receiving supply of an additional ball | bowl from an island installation at least in the middle of a jackpot.

  Next, the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. 86 (a). FIG. 86A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in this modification. As shown in FIG. 86A, the ROM 202 in this modification is provided with a ball supply setting table 202h instead of the payout speed selection table 202g defined in the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 87, the sphere supply setting table 202h is a data table that is referred to in each round of the jackpot to set the state of the supply of the spheres from the island facility. By referring to the ball supply setting table 202h, the payout speed of the winning balls can be reduced as the second half round of the jackpot. Therefore, since the payout of the prize ball in the jackpot is continued after the jackpot (that is, in the pseudo-interval presentation), the player's consciousness can be directed to the payout of the prize ball during the pseudo-interval presentation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress concentration of the player's consciousness on the pseudo-interval effect, so it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect during the big hit and the pseudo-interval effect after the big hit ends.

  FIG. 86 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present modification. As shown in FIG. 86 (b), in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment, the RAM 203 in the present modification is provided with a supply stop flag 203o, a stop period counter 203p, and a supply period counter 203q. .

  The supply stop flag 203o is a flag indicating whether or not the supply of balls from the island facility is stopped, and if the supply stop flag 203o is off, the supply of balls to the island facility is stopped. Indicates that. The supply stop flag 203o is switched on and off at time intervals determined for each round of the jackpot. It is also set on at the start of the jackpot.

  The stop period counter 203p is a counter that counts the stop period when the supply of balls to the island facility is stopped. In this modification, the supply stop state is maintained (that is, the supply permission is not set) for one second after the supply stop of the ball is instructed. The stop period counter 203p has an initial value (250) set at a time interval determined for each round of the big hit, and is decremented by 1 until the value becomes 0 at each main processing (see FIG. 88). Is configured.

  The supply period counter 203 q is a counter that counts the permission period when the island facility is permitted to supply the balls. In this modification, after the start of the round of the jackpot or after the cessation of the supply of the balls is released, the supply of the balls is permitted only for a predetermined time for each round. Every time the supply period counter 203 q permits the supply of the balls, a value corresponding to the time defined in the above-described ball supply setting table 202 h (see FIG. 87) is set as an initial value.

  Next, the ball supply setting table 202h will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the ball supply setting table 202 h is a data table for setting the frequency at which the supply of balls from the island facility is stopped in each round of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 87, in the ball supply setting table 202h, the frequency at which the supply of balls is stopped is defined in association with the value of the payout counter 203n (that is, in association with the number of rounds of jackpot).

  Specifically, when the value of the payout counter 203 n is 0 (that is, the first round), the island facility is not instructed to stop the supply of balls. For this reason, the ball stored in the tank of the pachinko machine 10 is paid out preferentially. In addition, when the value of the payout counter 203n is 1 (that is, the second round), the supply of the balls is stopped once in 10 seconds to the island facility. More specifically, the supply of the balls is permitted only for 9 seconds from the start of the second round, and the supply of the balls is stopped after 9 seconds to 10 seconds. After that, the supply permission state of 9 seconds and the supply stop state of 1 second are repeated until the end of the round. In this state, the supply amount of the balls supplied from the island facility is set so that the actual payout is delayed with respect to the payout request of the winning balls.

  In addition, when the value of the payout counter 203n is 2 (that is, the third round), the supply of the spheres to the island facility is stopped once in 5 seconds. More specifically, the supply of the balls is permitted only for 4 seconds from the start of the third round, and the supply of the balls is stopped after 4 seconds to 5 seconds. After that, the supply permission state for 4 seconds and the supply stop state for 1 second are repeated until the end of the round. Furthermore, when the value of the payout counter 203n is 3 to 14 (that is, the 4th to 15th rounds), the supply of balls to the island facility is stopped once every two seconds. More specifically, the supply of the balls is permitted only for one second from the start of each round, and the supply of the balls is stopped between one and two seconds. After that, the supply permission state for one second and the supply stop state for one second are repeated until the end of each round.

  By setting the supply permission state and the supply stop state with reference to the payout counter 203n, the frequency of stopping the ball supply to the island facility can be increased as the number of rounds of the jackpot advances. it can. That is, it becomes easy to happen that the balls for paying out are insufficient, and it becomes easy to interrupt the delivering of the winning balls. Therefore, as the round of the jackpot progresses, the period from the start of the payout of the winning balls to the completion of the payout can be extended, so that the winning balls are paid after the big hit (that is, during the pseudo interval effect) You can keep it out. Therefore, by directing the player's awareness to pay out the ball during the pseudo-interval effect, it is possible to suppress concentration of the player's awareness on the pseudo-interval effect. It can be made difficult to distinguish between the pseudo-interval effect after the end.

<About Control Process of Main Control Device in Modification of Fifth Embodiment>
Next, various types of processing executed by the MPU of the main control apparatus 110 according to the modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. First, FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the present modification. As described above, this main process is a process of executing main control of the game in a cycle of 4 ms.

  Among the main processes, the processes of S1101 to S1103, S1105 to S1116, and S1142 are respectively the same as the processes of S1101 to S1103, S1105 to S1116, and S1142 in the main process (see FIG. 78) in the fifth embodiment. Processing is performed. Then, in the main processing in the present modification, a sphere supply setting processing (S1151) is executed instead of the payout command setting processing (see FIG. 79) in the fifth embodiment. This ball supply setting process is a process for setting supply of balls to the island facility or stop of supply of balls at each round of the jackpot. The details of the ball supply setting process (S1151) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Next, the above-described sphere supply setting process will be described with reference to FIG. This ball supply setting process is a process for setting supply of balls to the island facility or stop of supply of balls at each round of the jackpot as described above. In addition, the instruction | indication content with respect to the island installation set in this ball | bowl supply setting process is output to an island installation via the external output terminal board 261. FIG.

  In the sphere supply setting process (see FIG. 89), first, it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit (S4701). If it is determined that a big hit is not being performed (S4701: No), the present process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4701 that the present is a big hit (S4701: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the payout counter 203n is 0 (that is, the first round of the big hit). (S4702). When it is determined that the value of the payout counter 203n is 0 (S4702: Yes), it is not necessary to set the stop of the supply of the balls to the island equipment, and the process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S4702 that the value of the payout counter 203n is not 0 (that is, 1 to 14), then it is determined whether the supply stop flag is on (S4703). If it is determined that the supply stop flag is on (S 4703), this means that the supply of the balls from the island facility is in the stop state, so the value of the stop period counter 203 p is decremented by one, The value is updated (S4704), and it is determined whether the value of the stop period counter 203p after the update is 0 (that is, a period for stopping the supply of the balls from the island facility has elapsed) (S4705).

  If it is determined in the process of S4705 that the value of the stop period counter 203p is not 0, it means that one second, which is a period for stopping the supply of balls from the island facility, has not elapsed, so this process is directly performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4705 that the value of the stop period counter 203p is 0, the supply permission is set in order to restart the supply of balls to the island facility (S4706). Next, with reference to the value of the payout counter 203n and the ball supply setting table 202h, an initial value is set in the supply period counter 203q (S4707). Then, the supply stop flag 203o is set to OFF (S4708), and the process ends. The initial value set in the supply period counter 203 q is a value corresponding to the permission period defined in the ball supply setting table 202 h. For example, if the value of the payout counter 203n is 1, the permission period is 9 seconds, so 2250 which is a counter value corresponding to 9 seconds is set.

  If it is determined in the process of S4703 that the supply stop flag 203o is off (S4703: No), it indicates that the supply of balls to the island facility is currently permitted, so the supply period counter The value is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of 203 q (S 4709), and the value of the supply period counter 203 q after the update is 0 (that is, a period for permitting supply of spheres from the island facility has passed) It is determined whether or not it is (S4710).

  If it is determined in the process of S4710 that the value of the supply period counter 203q is not 0 (S4710: No), this means that the period for permitting the island equipment to supply the sphere has not passed, so this is not End the process. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4710 that the value of the supply period counter 203q is 0 (S4710: Yes), the supply stop for stopping the supply of the balls to the island facility is set (S4711). Next, 250 (1 second / 4 ms) corresponding to one second is set as the value of the stop period counter 203p (S4712), the supply stop flag 203o is set to ON (S4713), and this processing is ended. Do.

  The supply permission or supply stop of the sphere set by the sphere supply setting process (see FIG. 89) is output to the island facility via the external output terminal 261. The island facility supplies the balls based on the instruction of each pachinko machine 10 electrically connected via the external output terminal 261.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, as the round of the jackpot progresses, the frequency of stopping the supply of the balls to the island facility that supplies the balls is higher. That is, the situation in which the ball for dispensing becomes insufficient tends to occur, making it easier to interrupt the payout of the winning balls. Therefore, as the round of the jackpot progresses, the period from the start of the payout of the winning balls to the completion of the payout can be extended, so that the winning balls are paid after the big hit (that is, during the pseudo interval effect) You can keep it out. Therefore, by directing the player's awareness to pay out the ball during the pseudo-interval effect, it is possible to suppress concentration of the player's awareness on the pseudo-interval effect. It can be made difficult to distinguish between the pseudo-interval effect after the end.

  In the present variation, the period of payout of the winning balls is varied by changing the frequency of stopping supply of the balls, but the period of dispensing of the winning balls is changed by changing the period of stopping the supply of balls. It may be configured as follows. For example, as the round progresses, the ball supply stop period may be increased by one second. As a result, as in the present modification, it is possible to extend the payout period of the winning balls toward the second half of the jackpot. Therefore, since the winning balls can be continuously paid out even during the pseudo-interval effect, the player's awareness can be directed to the playing of the winning balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress concentration of the player's consciousness on the pseudo-interval effect, so it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect during the big hit and the pseudo-interval effect after the big hit ends.

  In this modification, the stop frequency of supply of balls is high every round until the third round, and the supply stop frequency of balls is set to be the highest after the third round, but it is limited to this It is not something that can be done. For example, at the start of each round, a lottery may be performed to determine whether the ball supply stop frequency is to be high or low, and the supply stop frequency may be randomly changed. Also, the supply stop frequency of the balls may be increased or decreased according to the number of rounds. For example, if "the jackpot D (15 rounds jackpot)" having a large number of rounds continues, most of the balls will be paid out with the most frequent stop of supply of balls. For this reason, even after the jackpot and the pseudo interval effect end and the normal fluctuation pattern effect is executed, the payout balls may continue to be executed endlessly. In this case, there is a possibility that the player may feel anxious feeling that there is a problem in the payout control of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, for example, in the fifth to twelfth rounds of "big hit D", the supply stop of the balls is not performed, and in the thirteenth to fifteenth rounds, the supply stop frequency of the balls is increased again by one step. It may be configured as follows. By these, it is possible to prevent the payout balls from being continuously executed even after the normal variation pattern presentation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from being mistakenly identified as having a problem in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, the frequency of the supply stop of the balls is increased with the start of each round of the jackpot, but the trigger for changing the supply stop frequency of the balls is not limited to this. For example, in each round, the frequency at which the supply of balls is stopped may be varied based on the number of times the ball has won a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. For example, when the ball wins to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a at the first to seventh times, the supply stop of the ball is not set, and at the eighth time the ball is specified special winning opening (large opening ) If you win a prize to 65a, the supply stop of the ball is set at a frequency of once every 10 seconds, and if the ball wins to the specified prize winning opening (large open mouth) 65a at the ninth time, 1 for 5 seconds If the supply stop of the ball is set at the frequency of times and the ball wins to the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a at the 10th time, the supply stop of the ball is set at the frequency of once every two seconds You may configure it. As a result, in one round period, the supply of the balls is stopped more frequently in the second half of the period. Therefore, since the payout speed is slowed, the winning balls can be paid out also during the interval period after the end of each round or during the pseudo-interval effect. Therefore, during the pseudo-interval effect, the player's consciousness can be directed to the payout of the winning balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress concentration of the player's consciousness on the pseudo-interval effect, so it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect performed during the big hit and the pseudo-interval effect after the big hit ends. In addition, even if it does not become a jackpot after pseudo-interval production, by continuing to be paid out the prize balls, it is possible for the player to be immersed in the aftermath of the previous jackpot, disappointing that the jackpot did not continue It can reduce the feeling.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the frequency of supply stop of a ball might become high as a round advances uniformly in all the jackpots, it is not restricted to this. For example, when the pre-reading is performed during the jackpot and it is determined that the lottery result to be the jackpot is held, the frequency of the supply stop of the ball is increased, and the prize ball is paid out also during the pseudo interval effect after the jackpot It may be configured to continue. In this way, in the pseudo-interval effect to be executed between the present jackpot and the next jackpot, the player's awareness can be directed to the payout of the prize ball, so that the jackpot has been ended once It can be hard to notice. Therefore, since it can be felt that the jackpot has continued for a long time, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. On the contrary, in the pre-reading during the jackpot, while the lottery result for the jackpot is not held, the frequency of stopping supply of the balls is increased each time the round advances, and the lottery result for the jackpot is held. If it is determined, the supply of balls may not be stopped. If the lottery result that becomes the big hit during the big hit is not held, there is a possibility that the end of the big hit is notified as a result of the pseudo interval effect. In this case, by increasing the frequency of stopping the supply of balls, the payout speed of the winning balls is reduced, and if the winning balls are continuously paid out even after the end of the jackpot is notified, the player can receive the game. Can be immersed in the lingering of the previous jackpot, reducing the sense of disappointment for the jackpot not continuing. On the other hand, when a jackpot is to be made again via the pseudo interval effect, a large amount of prize balls will be paid out also at the next jackpot, so the time required to pay out the prize balls may be prolonged. In other words, there is a risk that the payout of the winning balls will continue to be performed for a long time after the repetition of the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect is completed (that is, during the normal variation pattern effect execution). There is a possibility that the machine 10 may be mistaken as having a problem. Therefore, if it is determined that the supply stop of the ball is not set when it is determined that the lottery result that is the jackpot is held, the payout of the balls is executed endlessly during the execution of the normal variation pattern effect. It can be suppressed to continue. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from being mistakenly identified as having a problem in the pachinko machine 10.

  In this modification, the various processes performed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 are configured to execute the same processes as the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, but for example, there is no ball in the tank. In this case, the retry process may not be performed. In the present modification, the ball supply amount from the island facility is adjusted so that the dare-off balls are insufficient, so it is a waste that retry processing is performed every time the balls are insufficient. That's why.

  In this modification, although it was constituted so that a prize ball will be paid out one by one if the balls to be paid out are supplied from the island equipment, the payment is kept pending until a certain amount of balls are supplied from the island equipment. It may be configured. For example, the payout may be suspended until a total of 150 balls are supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and the prize balls may be collectively dispensed when the 150 balls are supplied. As a result, since it is possible to add tonation how to be paid out, the player can be entertained. Further, it may be configured to pay out the pending payout based on a predetermined opportunity. The predetermined trigger includes, for example, the timing at which the symbol is determined and displayed, and the timing at which the start winning is performed first after the end of the jackpot, in the fluctuation pattern effect executed first after the jackpot end.

  Moreover, although the example which makes the frequency of supply stop of a ball variable with respect to the pachinko machine 10 which performs pseudo | simulation interval production was demonstrated in this modification, the ball is compared with the pachinko machine 10 which does not have the function of pseudo | simulation interval production It may be configured to vary the frequency of supply stoppage of Specifically, as the number of rounds of the jackpot progresses, the frequency of stopping the supply of balls may be increased, so that the payout of the prize balls may continue for a certain period of time even after the end of the jackpot. As a result, the player can be immersed in the aftermath of the previous jackpot, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

Modification of First Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIG. 90 and FIG. 91, a modification of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described. In the present modification, the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is modified with respect to the first embodiment. Specifically, when a winning information command is received, it is determined whether the variation is a variation to be executed over a special variation period, and if it is a variation exceeding, it is determined whether a special effect is to be executed. To be executed. In the special effect, an effect for prompting the user to press the button shown in FIG. 20A is displayed.

  First, with reference to FIG. 90, command determination processing in the present modification will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing command determination processing of the pachinko machine 10 in the present modification. Among the command determination processing, in each processing of S1601 to S1608 and each processing of S1610 to S1620, each processing of S1601 to S1608 in the command determination processing (refer to FIG. 36) in the first embodiment and S1610 to S1620 The same process as each process is performed. Then, in the command determination process of this modification (see FIG. 90), when it is determined that a winning information command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1608), the prefetch time setting process is then executed (S1650). End the process. The prefetch time setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 91 that follows.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the contents of the prefetch time setting process (S1650) executed in the process of S1650 of the command determination process (FIG. 90). In the pre-reading time setting process (FIG. 91, S1650), first, based on the winning information command received from main controller 110, the variation time of the variation pattern effect is calculated, and the calculated variation time is converted to winning information storage area 223a. It stores (S1651). Then, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern effect continues until a period longer than the period set as the special fluctuation period (S1652), and when it is judged to end within the special fluctuation period (S1652: No) This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation exceeds the special variation period (S1652: Yes), it is determined whether the lottery result indicated by the received winning command is a big hit (S1653). Then, when it is determined that the lottery result of the jackpot (S1653: Yes), the door effect is set for each fluctuation up to the fluctuation of the jackpot (S1654). Specifically, an effect is set in which the boy discovers a new door each time a change is performed. In addition, the door to be discovered may be provided with a plurality of modes, for example, it is easy to find a golden luxury door if the jackpot continues, and if the jackpot does not continue, the tree is simple. You may make it easy to find a door.

  When the process of S1654 ends, next, from the fluctuation pattern effect before the fluctuation that becomes the big hit, to the fluctuation pattern effect that becomes the big hit, pressing the frame button 22 sets the continuous hitting production that is the effect that the door opens (S1655). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Here, by continuously hitting the frame button 22, the door is opened, and an effect causing the player to virtually feel that the jackpot game is continuing is executed.

  When it is determined in the process of S1653 that the result is a lost lottery result (S1653: No), the effect counter (one of 0 to 198) is acquired (S1656), and the special effect lottery is executed. (S1657). In the special effect lottery, it is determined whether the value of the acquired effect counter is any one of 0 to 39.

  If it is determined that the special effect lottery has been won (S1657: Yes), a period until the variation of the effect corresponding to the received prize command is ended is set, and the door effect is set (S1658). Here, in response to the fluctuation display of the special symbol established before corresponding to the holding ball that has won the special effect lottery, the effect that the door appears continuously is executed. Then, an effect (progressive strike start notice effect) is set which suggests the occurrence of a continuous hitting effect which urges the user to press the frame button 22 across a plurality of changes (S1658). Thereafter, this process ends.

  As described above, the effect is executed in a period that spans a plurality of fluctuations according to the result of performing the pre-reading, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the boundary of the fluctuations even though the stride actually spans a plurality of fluctuations. Therefore, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol has been changed in the special change period effect, and to make the player think as if the multiple jackpots are one big hit effect. .

  As described above, in the present modification, when the special effect period is exceeded, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the continuous hit effect which is the special effect is performed. Furthermore, since the special effect is forcibly set if the result of the judgment is a hit, the player has an expectation that the jackpot will continue when the special effect is displayed. It can be carried out. Therefore, it is possible to play a game while suppressing the player from getting bored with the game. Also, by executing the pre-reading process, it is possible to set the special effect period based on the lottery result before the start of the change, and it is possible to execute the effect of continuing the jackpot game.

  Therefore, the player can feel that the jackpot period continues for a long time, and can enjoy the improvement of the interest of the game. Further, in the present embodiment, by performing the door effect for a plurality of changes, the door effect is set to be performed for a plurality of times in a continuous manner, so that the player is expected to continue the big hit. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and an effect such as counting down the period until the continuous hitting effect is started may be performed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the door opening effect (see FIGS. 18 (a) and 18 (b)) is performed at every interval period of the big hit (see FIGS. 18 (a) and 18 (b)). ) An interval period to be executed and an interval period to perform an effect different from the effect of opening the door may be provided. That is, an effect different from the pseudo interval effect may be performed in the interval period. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot interval is in progress at the time when the effects of different modes are generated. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the next round is started after the end of the effect before the end of the effect, so it is possible to give the player a sense of security against the continuation of the jackpot.

  In each of the above embodiments, the pseudo-interval effect is performed in the total period of the special variation period after the end of the big hit and the opening period of the big win won during the special variation period, but the invention is not limited thereto. . For example, the configuration may be such that the opening period of the jackpot is not provided, and the pseudo-interval effect is completed in the special variation period after the jackpot end. By configuring in this way, the interval presentation during the jackpot and the presentation interval of the pseudo interval presentation can be shortened, so the round interval can be shortened. Therefore, the increase speed of the winning balls can be increased. In addition, the opening period may be provided only for the jackpot won without passing through the pseudo-interval effect, and the opening period may not be provided for the jackpot winning via the pseudo-interval effect. As a result, in the jackpot that is won first, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the jackpot to start from now on due to the opening effect performed in the opening period. In addition, an opening period and an ending period may be provided in the jackpot, and the pseudo-interval effect may be performed also in these periods. In addition, these periods may be configured to be variable according to the content of the pseudo interval effect and the like. As a result, since the effect period can be set according to the content of the pseudo interval effect, etc., it is possible to suppress the player from feeling discomfort due to the difference between the effect period and the effect content. it can.

  Although the above embodiments are configured to display the number of rounds during the jackpot, the number of rounds may not be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult to understand how many rounds of jackpots will be given, so it is possible for the player to have a sense of expectation that they will not know how long jackpots will last. I can play a game. Further, in this case, when the end display of the pseudo interval effect is performed, the total number of rounds that the player has digested may be displayed while the jackpot and the pseudo interval effect are repeated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player recognize the number of rounds that have been digested, so if a large number of rounds is displayed, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction, and a small number of rounds. If displayed, in the next jackpot game, the game can be played with the goal of acquiring more rounds.

  In addition, the present invention may be implemented to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to slot machines and pachinko machines, various types of game machines may be implemented, such as arelapi and ball ball, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols and does not include a handle for ball launch. The thing is mentioned. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  In addition, it is good also as a pachinko machine which combined each one part or all of each above-mentioned embodiment, respectively.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown.

<Feature A group> (match the duration of the pseudo-interval effect after the end of the jackpot to the interval effect during the jackpot)
A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, a bonus game transition means for shifting a state to a bonus game state advantageous for the player when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, and a predetermined ball entering the ball Opening and closing to set an open state in which the ball can enter and a closed state in which the ball is restricted in the above-mentioned bonus gaming state as the state of the ball entrance that provides a valuable value of Setting means, closed period setting means for setting a closed period in which the state of the ball entry is in the closed state by the opening / closing setting means, and dynamic display of identification information indicating lottery results by the lottery means It comprises: a dynamic display execution means to be executed; and an execution period setting means for setting an execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information to be executed by the dynamic display execution means, the execution period setting means comprising: After the In the case where the dynamic display of the identification information to be the specific lottery result is performed in a predetermined period, the identification is performed until a period of the same length as the closed period elapses after the bonus gaming state is ended. A game machine A1 characterized in that the execution period can be set so that dynamic display of information ends.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, the state is shifted to the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player by the special game transition means. A predetermined valuable value is given by the ball entering the ball entrance, and the open state where the ball can enter and the closed state where the ball entrance is restricted are opened and closed as the state of the ball entrance. The closing period setting unit sets the closing period, which is a period in which the state of the ball entrance is closed by the opening / closing setting unit. The dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information is set by the execution period setting means. And, in the case where the dynamic display of the identification information to be a specific lottery result is performed in a predetermined period after the end of the bonus game state, a period having the same length as the closed period after the end of the bonus game state is The execution period is set by the execution period setting unit so that the dynamic display of the identification information is completed before the elapse of time.

  As a result, when a specific lottery result is obtained in a predetermined period after the end of the bonus game state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the bonus game state is ended. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel as if the bonus game state has continued for a longer time, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine A1, a gaming machine A2 including suggestion effect execution means for performing a closing period suggestion effect that suggests the closing period in the predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, a closing period suggestion effect that suggests closing in a predetermined period is executed by the suggestion effect executing means, so In the predetermined period of time, it can be made difficult for the player to recognize that the bonus game state has ended. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel as if the bonus game state has continued for a longer time, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine A2, when setting the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information in the predetermined period, the execution period setting means executes the dynamic display of the identification information set in the previous period. A game machine A3 characterized in that an execution period of a length equal to or less than the period is set.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, when the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information is set by the execution period setting means in the predetermined period, the identification information previously set in the predetermined period Since the execution period of a length equal to or less than the execution period of the dynamic display of is set, the dynamic display of identification information of the shorter execution period is executed in the second half of the predetermined period. Therefore, since a large number of predetermined lotterys are executed in the second half of the predetermined period, a specific lottery result is obtained within the predetermined period, and when transitioning to the bonus game state, the second period of the predetermined period is shifted It will be easier. Therefore, since the time until the next bonus game state is started can be made less likely to vary, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the bonus game state has ended.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information with the predetermined number of times as an upper limit in the predetermined period, and the dynamic display of the identification information of the predetermined number of times Among the above, when the last dynamic display of the identification information is performed, the dynamic display of the identification information is ended based on the passage of the same length of time as the closed period. A4 gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display execution determining unit executes the dynamic display of the identification information with the predetermined number as the upper limit in the predetermined period. In addition, when the last dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means among the dynamic display of the identification information of the predetermined number of times, based on the passage of the same length of time as the closed period. Dynamic display of identification information is ended.

  As a result, since the period for executing the closed period suggestion effect is set to be the same length as the closed period, it is the closed period or the bonus game state is ended and the closed period suggestion effect is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether it has been done. Thus, the player can be made to feel that he is in the bonus game state even after the bonus game state has ended, so that the player can be made to feel that the bonus game state is continuing for a long time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine A4, when the execution period setting means sets an execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result in the predetermined period, the execution period setting means performs the same period as the closed period. A game machine A5 characterized in that the remaining period is set as an execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A4, when the execution period of the dynamic display of identification information indicating a specific lottery result is set by the execution period setting means in the predetermined period, Since the remaining period for the period of the same length is set as the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information, whether it is a closed period or a bonus gaming state regardless of whether or not a specific lottery result is obtained in a predetermined period. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the closing period suggestion effect is being executed. Thus, the player can be made to feel that he is in the bonus game state even after the bonus game state has ended, so that the player can be made to feel that the bonus game state is continuing for a long time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines A4 and A5, the execution period setting unit sets the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information in the predetermined period based on the remaining number of times for the predetermined number of times. A game machine A6 characterized by being a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects exhibited by either the gaming machine A4 or A5, when the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information is set by the execution period setting means in the predetermined period, the remaining for the predetermined number of times Since the execution period of the dynamic display is set based on the number of times, it is possible to make the lengths of the closed period suggestion effects less likely to vary. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to discriminate whether the closing period or the closing period suggestion effect is executed after the bonus game state is finished.

  In any one of the game machines A2 to A6, the execution period setting unit sets the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information in the period of the same length as the closed period, the same length as the closed period. A game machine A7 which is set based on the remaining time until the period of time elapses.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information is set by the execution period setting means in the period of the same length as the closed period. Since the execution period is set based on the remaining time until the period of the same length as the closing period elapses, it is possible to make the lengths of the closing period suggestion effects less likely to vary. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to discriminate whether the closing period or the closing period suggestion effect is executed after the bonus game state is finished.

  In any one of the game machines A1 to A4, the closed period setting means selects one period from a plurality of periods having different lengths and sets it as the closed period.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines A1 to A4, one period is selected from a plurality of periods with different lengths by the closing period setting means and is set as the closing period. The length can be diversified. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to discriminate whether the closing period or the closing period suggestion effect is executed after the bonus game state is finished.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the bonus game when the specified lottery result is not obtained in the lottery performed by the lottery means until the period of the same length as the closed period of 1 ends. A game machine A9 comprising end notification means for notifying that the state has ended.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the lottery performed by the lottery means until the end of the same length of time as the closed period of 1 is a specific lottery result If not, the end notifying means informs that the bonus gaming state has ended, so that it is possible to make the player recognize that the bonus gaming state has ended.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, when the dynamic display execution means performs the dynamic display of the identification information in a period of the same length as the closed period, the identification information is A game machine A10 characterized by dynamic display at a position off center.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, identification is performed when dynamic display of identification information is executed by the dynamic display executing means in a period of the same length as the closing period. Since the time-specific information is dynamically displayed at a position where the information deviates from the center of the line of sight of the player, it can be made difficult for the player to recognize that the dynamic display of the identification information is being performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to discriminate whether the closing period or the closing period suggestion effect is executed after the bonus game state is finished.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the bonus gaming state has a plurality of types in which the number of open states set by the opening / closing setting means is different from one another, and the bonus game transitioning means A game machine A11 characterized by selecting and setting 1 type from the plurality of types of the bonus game states when a specific lottery result is obtained by the means.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the following effects are exerted. That is, the bonus game state has a plurality of types in which the number of open states set by the open / close setting unit is different from each other. When a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, the type of one is selected and set by the bonus game transition means from among the plurality of types of bonus game states.

  This makes it difficult to predict how many times the open state is set in the bonus game state. Therefore, when the open state is set a plurality of times, whether the open state has been set a plurality of times in one bonus gaming state or a plurality of open states are continuously transferred to a plurality of bonus gaming states It can be difficult to distinguish whether it has been set. Therefore, since it is possible to execute the game while expecting a large number of open states to be set, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Feature B group> (Perform the same effect as the interval effect after a big hit)
Effect execution means for executing an effect, lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, bonus game transition means for shifting the state to a bonus game state advantageous for the player when a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means , A ball entrance to which a predetermined valuable value is given by the ball entering the ball, and an open state in which the ball can enter the ball and a closed state in which the ball entering is restricted as the state of the ball entrance And opening / closing setting means for setting in the bonus gaming state of 1, and closing period setting means for setting closing period which is a period for setting the state of the ball entrance to the closing state by the opening / closing setting means, The means is characterized in that the same image as the closed period image which is an image displayed in the effect to be executed in the closed period is displayed in the effect to be executed in a predetermined period after the bonus game state is ended. A game machine 1.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the effect is executed by the effect executing means. Further, when a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, the bonus game transition means shifts to a bonus game state advantageous to the player. A predetermined valuable value is given by the ball entering the ball entrance, and the open state where the ball can enter and the closed state where the ball entrance is restricted are opened and closed as the state of the ball entrance. The closing period setting unit sets the closing period, which is a period in which the state of the ball entrance is closed by the opening / closing setting unit. In the effect executed by the effect executing means in a predetermined period after the bonus game state is ended, the same image as the closed period image displayed in the effect executed in the closed period is displayed.

  Thereby, it is possible to make it feel as if the bonus gaming state continues during a predetermined period after the bonus gaming state ends. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel that the bonus game state advantageous to the player is continuing for a longer time, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine B1, the bonus gaming state has a plurality of types with different numbers of open states set by the opening / closing setting means, and the bonus game transition means is specified by the lottery means. A gaming machine B2 characterized by selecting and setting 1 type from the plurality of types of the bonus game states when a lottery result is obtained.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1, the bonus gaming state has a plurality of types with different numbers of open states set by the opening / closing setting means, and a specific lottery result by the lottery means If one of the plurality of types of bonus game states is selected and set by the bonus game transition means when the game becomes, the number of open states to be set is predicted when the bonus game state is reached. It can be difficult. Furthermore, since the closed period image is displayed in the predetermined period, when the open period is set a plurality of times, whether it is the open period of 1 bonus gaming state, it becomes a specific lottery result in the predetermined period, the bonus It is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether the open period has been set more than once as a result of shifting to the gaming state more than once. Therefore, since it is possible to play the game in the bonus game state while expecting a large number of open periods to be set, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a period discriminating means for discriminating whether or not a period of the same length as the closed period has elapsed after the end of the bonus gaming state, and the same length as the closed period by the period discriminating means A game machine B3 comprising end suggestion effect executing means for executing an end suggestion effect suggesting an end of the bonus game state when it is determined that the duration of the bonus game has passed.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, it is determined by the period determination means whether or not a period equal to the closing period has elapsed after the bonus gaming state has ended, and the closing period When it is determined that the same period of time has elapsed, the end suggestion effect that suggests the end of the bonus game state is executed by the end suggestion effect execution means, so the bonus game state has ended for the player Has the effect of being able to

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the closed period image is displayed by the effect executing unit, the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the dynamic display executing unit is the closed period image. A game machine B4 characterized by being executed in a mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize in comparison with the above.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the closed period image is displayed by the effect executing means, the dynamic of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means Since the display is performed in a mode that is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the closed period image, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the closed period and the predetermined period after the bonus gaming state ends. It has the effect of being able to

  A display means capable of displaying one or both of the pre-closed period image displayed by the effect executing means and the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means on the display screen in the gaming machine B4 In the case where the closed period image and the dynamic display of the identification information are displayed on the display means, the dynamic display of the identification information is displayed in a narrow range compared to the closed period image. A gaming machine B5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exerted. That is, one or both of the closed period image displayed by the effect execution means and the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the dynamic display execution means are displayed on the display screen by the display means. When the closed period image and the dynamic display of the identification information are displayed on the display means, the dynamic display of the identification information is displayed in a narrower range than the closed period image.

  As a result, it can be made difficult for the player to recognize that the dynamic display of the identification information is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the closed period and the predetermined period after the bonus game state is over.

  In the gaming machine B4, when the closed period image is displayed by the effect executing means, the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the dynamic display executing means is a mode in which the identification information is translucent. Gaming machine B6 characterized by being displayed.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B4, when the pseudo pause suggestion effect by the effect execution means is being executed, the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display execution means is such that the identification information is half Since the information is displayed in a transparent manner, it can be made difficult for the player to recognize that the dynamic display of the identification information is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the closed period and the predetermined period after the bonus game state is over.

  A game machine B7 comprising pseudo dynamic display execution means for performing dynamic display of identification information in a pseudo manner during the provision suspension period in any of the game machines B1 to B6.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the dynamic display of the pseudo identification information is executed by the pseudo dynamic display executing means in the closing period, so the closing period is There is an effect that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the predetermined period after the end of the bonus game state.

<Feature C group> (Determining display mode of pseudo-interval effect based on pre-reading result)
Effect execution means for executing an effect, lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, bonus game transition means for shifting the state to a bonus game state advantageous for the player when a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means , A ball entrance to which a predetermined valuable value is given by the ball entering the ball, and an open state in which the ball can enter the ball and a closed state in which the ball entering is restricted as the state of the ball entrance Opening / closing setting means set in the bonus game state of 1, closing period setting means for setting a closing period which is a period in which the state of the ball entrance is put in the closing state by the opening / closing setting means, and lottery by the lottery means Dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information based on the result, storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means until the lottery condition is established, and the storage means Said information And an advance lottery means for executing the predetermined lottery in advance before the lottery condition is established, and the effect execution means is in the closed period in a predetermined period after the bonus game state is ended. To execute the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result when the specific lottery result is obtained by the prior lottery means. A game machine C1 characterized by performing at least the closed period suggestion effect until the end of the game.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the effect is executed by the effect executing means. A predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition using the information acquired by the acquiring means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. When a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, the state is shifted to a bonus game state advantageous to the player by the bonus game transition means. A predetermined valuable value is given by the ball entering the ball entrance, and the open state where the ball can enter and the closed state where the ball entrance is restricted are opened and closed as the state of the ball entrance. The closing period setting unit sets the closing period, which is a period in which the state of the ball entrance is closed by the opening / closing setting unit. Dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution unit based on the lottery result by the lottery unit, and the information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored by the storage unit until the establishment of the lottery condition. A predetermined lottery is executed in advance by the pre-lottery unit before the lottery condition is established using the information stored in the storage unit. Here, in the effect execution means, a closed period suggestion effect which is an effect suggesting that it is a closed period is executed in a predetermined period after the bonus game state is ended, and a specific lottery result is obtained by the advance lottery means In this case, at least the closed period suggestion effect is executed until the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is finished.

  Thereby, after the end of the bonus game state, the closed period suggestion effect is executed in the period until the next bonus game state is started based on the information indicating the specific lottery result stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to make it feel that the bonus game state of 1 is continuing without the end of the bonus game state. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel that a bonus game state advantageous to the player continues for a long time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C1, in the predetermined period, the effect executing means determines that the information stored in the storage means contains information to be a predetermined lottery result, and the information determining means determines the information. When the dynamic display of the identification information is executed after the predetermined period is exceeded by the dynamic display execution unit, the closed period suggestion effect is extended until the dynamic display of the identification information is ended. A game machine C2 characterized in that the game machine C2 includes effect extending means.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, in the predetermined period, it is determined that the information stored in the storage means by the information determination means includes information to be a predetermined lottery result, When the dynamic display of the identification information is executed after the predetermined period by the dynamic display execution means, the pause indication effect is extended by the effect extension means until the dynamic display of the identification information is finished. Therefore, when the length of the pause suggestion effect is longer than the predetermined period, it is possible to make the player recognize that the bonus gaming state may continue. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player more enjoyable the pause suggestion effect.

  In the gaming machine C2, in the predetermined period, the information determining means determines that the information stored in the storage means contains information to be a predetermined lottery result, and the dynamic is determined based on the information. A period determining unit configured to determine in advance a period until dynamic display of the identification information ends when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed after the predetermined period is exceeded by the display execution unit; A game machine C3 characterized in that the effect executing means sets the content of the closed period suggestive effect extended by the effect extending means, based on the period determined by the period determining means.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the predetermined period, it is determined that the information stored in the storage means contains information to be a predetermined lottery result, and based on the information, the dynamic display execution means exceeds the predetermined period When dynamic display of identification information is executed after that, a period until dynamic display of the identification information ends is determined in advance by the period determination means. Then, based on the period determined by the period determination means, the contents of the closed period suggestion effect extended by the effect extension means are set by the effect execution means.

  Thereby, the content of the closed period suggestion effect extended by the effect extension means can be made the content according to the period until the dynamic display of the identification information ends. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling discomfort as the closing period suggested effect deviates from the start of the special game state.

  The gaming machine C2 or C3 includes period determination means for determining whether or not the predetermined period has elapsed after the end of the bonus game state, and the effect execution means performs the predetermined period according to the period determination means. A game machine C4 comprising end indication effect execution means for executing an end indication effect that suggests the end of the bonus game state when it is determined that the time elapsed.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the following effects are exerted. That is, it is determined by the period determination means whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed after the end of the bonus game state. In addition, in the effect execution means, the end indication effect indicating the end of the bonus game state is executed by the end indication effect execution means when it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed by the period judgment means.

  This has the effect that the player can clearly recognize whether or not the bonus game state has ended.

  In the gaming machine C4, after the end suggestion effect executed by the end suggestion effect executing means is completed, the effect extending means dynamically executes the identification information to be executed based on the information to be the predetermined lottery result. A game machine C5 characterized in that the closed period suggestion effect is executed until the display is ended.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C4, after the end suggestion effect executed by the end suggestion effect executing means is completed, identification information to be executed based on the information to be a predetermined lottery result. Since the closed period suggestion effect is executed by the effect extension means until the dynamic display is finished, the player is made to recognize that the possibility to become the bonus game state is left even when the end suggestion effect is finished. it can. Therefore, even if the end suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the bonus game state, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine C5, when the closed period suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is compared with the closed period suggestion effect. Game machine C6 characterized in that it is executed in a mode that is difficult to visually recognize.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4, the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means is closed when the closed period suggestive effect is executed by the effect executing means. Since it is executed in a mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the term suggestion effect, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish the term in which the close term suggestion effect is being executed and the closing period in the bonus game state. Therefore, it is possible to be more interested in whether or not to be in the bonus game state after the closing period suggestion effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Feature D group> (It reduces the effect when detecting the stop of emission)
Effect execution means for executing an effect, lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, and benefit game transition means for shifting the state to a bonus game state advantageous to the player when a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means , A ball entrance to which a predetermined valuable value is given by the ball entering the ball, and an open state in which the ball can enter the ball and a closed state in which the ball entering is restricted as the state of the ball entrance 1) open / close setting means set in the bonus game state, closed period setting means for setting a closed period which is a period in which the state of the ball entrance is put in the closed state by And an operation determining unit configured to determine the content of the operation performed on the emitting unit, the effect executing unit closing the closed state during a predetermined period after the bonus game state is ended. Suggest that it is a period To perform the closed period suggestion effect which is the effect, and the production variable means is provided to vary the content of the closed period suggestion effect when it is determined by the operation determination means that the predetermined determination result is obtained. A gaming machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the effect is executed by the effect execution means and a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, the bonus game transition means is shifted to the advantageous game state advantageous to the player by the bonus game transition means. Then, a predetermined valuable value is given by the ball entering the ball entrance, and as the state of the ball entrance, the open state where the ball can enter and the closed state where the ball entry is restricted Is set by the opening / closing setting means in the first bonus game state, and the closing period setting means sets the closing period which is a period during which the state of the ball entrance is closed by the opening / closing setting means. The content of the operation on the launching means for firing the ball based on the operation by the player is determined by the operation determining means. In the effect execution means, after the bonus game state is over, a closed period suggestion effect which is an effect indicating that it is a closed period is executed, and it is determined that the operation determination means determines that the result is a predetermined determination result The content of the pause indication effect is variable by the effect variable means.

  As a result, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the player on the shooting means, so that the closing period suggestion effect can be varied in accordance with the player's preference. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine D1, the gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the effect variable means changes the content of the closing period suggestion effect into content suggesting the end of the bonus gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the content of the closing period suggestion effect is changed to the content that suggests the end of the bonus gaming state by the effect variable means, so the bonus gaming state has ended Can be recognized by the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that interruption of the game is possible, and to take a break or the like. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game with sharpening.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, whether dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means and dynamic display of the identification information are performed by the dynamic display execution means And the effect variable means is determined by the operation determination means to be a predetermined determination result, and the dynamic display execution determination means determines the dynamic of the identification information. A game machine D3 characterized in that the contents of the closed period suggestion effect are variable when it is determined that the display is not executed.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the dynamic display execution means performs the dynamic display whether or not the dynamic display of the identification information is performed. It is determined by the determination means. Then, in the effect variable means, the operation judgment means judges that the predetermined judgment result is obtained, and the dynamic display execution judgment means judges that the dynamic display of the identification information is not executed, The contents of are variable.

  As a result, it is possible to make a player who has confirmed that the content of the closing period suggestion effect has been changed can recognize that the bonus gaming state has ended. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that interruption of the game is possible, and to take a break or the like. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game with sharpening.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when changing the content of the closed period suggestion effect, the effect variable means changes the presentation period of the closed period suggestion effect after the variable is the closed period suggestion effect before the variable. A game machine D4 characterized in that the content is variable so as to be shorter than the effect period.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the content of the closed period suggestion effect is variable by the effect variable means, the effect period of the closed period suggestion effect after variable is variable Since the contents are changed so as to be shorter than the effect period of the previous closed period suggestion effect, it is possible to recognize earlier that interruption of the game is possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game with sharpening.

  In the gaming machine D4, the effect execution means suggests the end of the bonus game state when the predetermined lottery result is not obtained by the lottery means by the predetermined period after the end of the bonus game state. The suggestion effect is executed, and the effect variable means changes the content of the close period suggestion effect into the content of the end suggestion effect when the content of the closed period suggestion effect is variable. A game machine D5 to be characterized.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D4, an end suggestion that suggests the end of the bonus gaming state when the predetermined lottery result is not reached by a predetermined period after the bonus gaming state is over. The effect is executed by the effect executing means. Then, when the content of the closed period suggestion effect is variable by the effect variable means, the content of the closed period suggestion effect is variable to the content of the end suggestion effect.

  As a result, it can be suggested to the player more quickly that the bonus game state has ended, so it is possible to recognize earlier that interruption of the game is possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game with sharpening.

  In any one of the gaming machine D1 to the gaming machine D5, the predetermined operation is performed when the operation determining unit determines that the player has not performed an operation for causing the firing unit to fire a ball for a certain period. It is determined that the determination result is a game machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, it is determined that the player has not performed an operation for causing the firing means to launch a ball for a certain period. In this case, since it is determined by the operation determination means that the predetermined determination result is obtained, it is possible to quickly suggest to the player that the bonus game state has ended, and allow the player to resume the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

  The gaming machine D6 includes operation detection means for repeatedly detecting at a predetermined cycle whether or not the player is performing an operation for causing the firing means to fire a ball, the operation determination means comprising It is determined that the predetermined determination result is the predetermined determination result when the operation detecting means continuously detects that the player's operation has not been performed a predetermined number of times continuously. .

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D6, the operation detecting means repeatedly detects whether the player is performing an operation for causing the firing means to fire a ball by a predetermined cycle. When the operation detecting means continuously detects that the player's operation has not been performed for a predetermined number of times, the operation judging means judges that the predetermined judgment result is obtained. There is an effect that it is possible to more accurately determine whether the user is performing the operation.

  In the gaming machine D7, the detection means is constituted by a touch sensor for detecting whether or not the player is touching the firing means, and the operation determining means is that the player touches the firing means by the operation detecting means. The gaming machine D8 is characterized in that it is determined that the predetermined determination result is obtained when the absence is continuously detected a predetermined number of times.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D7, the gaming machine D8 is provided with detection means configured with a touch sensor that detects whether the player touches the launching means, and the player If the player does not touch the launching means continuously for a predetermined number of times, it is determined by the operation deciding means that the result of the decision is a predetermined decision result. Can be determined more accurately.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the closing period is set to a specific length of time, and the effect executing means is configured to close the same length of time as the specific length of time. A game machine D9 characterized by performing a period suggestion effect.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the closing period suggestive effect is executed by the effect executing means in a period of the same length as the closing period. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the period of execution and the closed period. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel that the bonus game state has continued for a long time, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Feature E group> (makes it easy to accumulate the reserve of special figure 2 in the jackpot)
A game in which the ball can enter the ball into either the ball entry state or the game state is set to either the first state or the second state in which the ball is more likely to enter the ball entrance than the first state. A predetermined lottery is performed based on the establishment of a lottery condition using state setting means, acquisition means for acquiring information based on the ball entering the ball entrance, and the information acquired by the acquisition means The lottery means, a bonus game transition means for shifting the state to an advantageous bonus game state for the player based on the specific lottery result by the lottery means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means A game machine E1 comprising: storage means capable of storing data until a lottery by means is performed, and the gaming state setting means sets the second state during the bonus game state.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means to either the first state or the second state in which the ball is more likely to enter the ball entrance than the first state. In addition, information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the ball entering the ball entrance. When the lottery condition is established, a predetermined lottery using the acquired information is performed by the lottery means, and based on the particular lottery result by the lottery means, an advantage advantageous to the player by the bonus game transition means The state is shifted to the gaming state. Then, the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means until the lottery by the lottery means is performed. Then, during the bonus game state, the second state is set by the game state setting means.

  Thereby, in the bonus game state, the game is set to a game state in which the ball is easy to enter the ball entrance, so that the information can be easily acquired by the acquisition unit during the bonus game state. Therefore, more information is stored by the storage means before the end of the bonus game state, so that it is possible to easily perform a predetermined lottery after the end of the bonus game state.

  In the gaming machine E1, as the state of the value-granting entrance to which a predetermined valuable value is given when the ball enters the ball, and the value-improved entrance, the ball can enter the open state and the ball enters the ball Closed by the opening / closing setting means for setting the closed state in which the limit is restricted in the above-mentioned privilege gaming state, and the opening / closing setting means A period setting means, and an effect execution means for executing a closed period suggestion effect which is an effect that is artificially suggested to be the closed period in a predetermined period after the bonus game state is ended, the predetermined period A game machine E2 characterized in that the lottery by the lottery means has a length that can be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exerted. That is, a predetermined valuable value is imparted by entering the ball into the value-granting entrance, and as the state of the value-entering entrance, the open state in which the ball can enter and the ball entering are restricted. The closed state is set by the open / close setting means in the first bonus game state, and the closed period setting means sets the closed period which is the period in which the state of the value-added entrance is closed. In the predetermined period after the bonus game state is ended, a closing period suggestion effect which is an effect suggesting that it is a closing period is set by the effect executing means. In addition, in a predetermined period, the lottery by the lottery means is executed a plurality of times.

  Thus, the player can feel as if the bonus game state is continuing while the closing period suggestion effect is being executed, so that the bonus game state is felt to last for a long time. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine E2, the storage means is provided with a predetermined upper limit for the number of pieces of information that can be stored, and the predetermined period is a number of times greater than the predetermined upper limit by the lottery means. A game machine E3 characterized in that it is a period for which the lottery is at least executable.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E2, a predetermined upper limit is provided for the number of pieces of information that can be stored in the storage means, and the predetermined upper limit is exceeded by the lottery means in a predetermined period. Since the lottery of the number of times can be executed, it becomes a specific lottery result during execution of the closed period suggestion effect, and it can be made easy to shift to the bonus game state. As a result, the bonus gaming state and the closing period suggestion effect can be easily repeated, so that the player can be made to feel that the bonus gaming state continues for a long time. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the ball hitting ball strikes the value-improved ball entrance compared to the case where the player kicks out the ball without aiming at the value-ditch ball entrance. A game machine E4 characterized in that the ball is provided at a position where it is easy to enter the ball.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the ball aims at the value-imparting entrance as compared to the case where the player strikes the ball without aiming at the value-improved entrance. Since the entrance is provided at a position where it is easy for the ball to enter the ball, the ball that strikes the value-added entrance to obtain a predetermined gaming value during the bonus game state It becomes easy to enter the ball into the entrance, and the information can be easily acquired by the acquiring means. Therefore, there is an effect that more information can be stored in the storage means during the bonus game state.

  A gaming machine according to any one of game machines E1 to E4, wherein the game state setting means sets the second state when initialization of the game machine is executed.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the second state is set by the gaming state setting means when the initial setting for the gaming machine is executed, so that the bonus gaming state It is possible to match the gaming state in with the gaming state set when the initial setting is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the gaming state in the bonus gaming state can be made into the gaming state in accordance with the gaming rules.

  In the gaming machine E5, the gaming state setting means is capable of setting the first state based on an end of the bonus gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5, the first state is set by the gaming state setting means based on the end of the bonus gaming state, so the second state continues endlessly, and the game machine is released. As a result of the increase in the ball rate, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's irritability from being excessively stimulated.

<Feature F group> (vary the payout speed of the winning balls during the jackpot)
A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, a bonus game transition means for shifting the state to a bonus game state advantageous to the player based on a specific lottery result by the lottery means, and entry of a ball being permitted Ball entry permission state and ball entry restricted state in which the ball entry is restricted is set to either of the ball entry state and the state of the ball entry in the bonus game state. In order to pay out the valuable object by the permission setting means for setting the permission state, the dispensing means for dispensing a predetermined number of valuable objects when the ball enters the ball entrance, and the dispensing means A game machine F1 comprising: variable means for changing the required payout time.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the fact that a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, the state is shifted to the advantageous game state advantageous to the player by the bonus game transition means. In the bonus game state, the permission setting means sets the state of the entrance to the entrance permission state where entrance of the ball is permitted, and a predetermined number of predetermined balls are entered when the ball enters the entrance. The valuable object is dispensed by the dispensing means, and the dispensing means varies the dispensing time required to dispense the valuable object by the variable means.

  As a result, since it is possible to add tonation how the valuable objects are paid out during the bonus game state, the player can be entertained not only by the amount of valuable objects being paid out, but also by the manner of being paid out. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine F1, the bonus gaming state is configured to have a plurality of ball entry permission periods, which is a period set to the ball entry permission state by the ball entry permission means, and the variable means includes one of the benefits The payout time in the ball entering permission period set in the second half of the plurality of ball entering permission periods set in the gaming state is longer than the payout time in the ball entering permission period set in the first half A game machine F2 characterized in that the payout time is variable.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the bonus game state, it is configured to have a plurality of entrance permission periods, which are periods set to the entrance permission state by the entrance permission means. In addition, the variable means is a payout time in the entering permission period set in the first half of the plurality of entering permission periods set in the one bonus gaming state, the payout time in the entering permission period set in the second half The payout time can be varied to be longer than that.

  As a result, even after the bonus game state is over, valuable objects can be paid out. Therefore, even after the bonus game state is over, the player can be immersed in the aftermath of the bonus game state while the valuable object is paid out. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine F2, the bonus gaming state is set between a plurality of the ball entry permission periods and the plurality of the ball entry permission periods, and the state of the ball inlet is set to the ball entry restriction state Suggestive effect executing means configured to have a time limit for entering a ball and having a restriction suggestion effect that is an effect suggesting that the period is a time limit for entering a ball after the bonus game state is ended. A game machine F3 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the bonus game state is set between a plurality of entrance permission periods and the plurality of entrance permission periods, and is a period during which the state of the entrance is a period set to the entrance restriction state, and It consists of Then, after the bonus game state is over, a restriction suggestion effect which is a effect suggesting that it is a ball entry restriction period is executed by the suggestion effect execution means.

  As a result, even after the bonus game state ends, it is possible to make the player feel as if it is in the bonus game state while the restriction suggestion effect is being executed. In addition, even after the bonus game state is over, since the provision of valuable objects continues, it is possible to turn the player's consciousness to the valuable objects to be granted. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the period in which the restriction suggestion effect is being executed and the entering restriction period, so that the player feels that the bonus gaming state has continued longer than in reality. Can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In any one of the game machines F1 to F3, the payout means has a motor, and when the motor rotates by a predetermined rotation amount, the valuable object of the predetermined number of units is dispensed, and the variable means A game machine F4, characterized in that the payout time is varied by varying the rotational speed of the motor.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the payout means has a motor, and when the motor rotates by a predetermined rotation amount, valuable objects of a predetermined number of units are paid out. Then, in the variable means, the payout time is changed by changing the rotational speed of the motor.

  As a result, there is an effect that an arbitrary dispensing time can be set accurately by the electrical control on the motor.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the payout means has a motor, and the value of the predetermined number of units of the valuable object is paid out by rotating the motor by a predetermined amount of rotation, and the motor The rotation amount determining means for determining whether or not the motor has rotated by a specific rotation amount, and the operation of the motor for only a predetermined period when it is determined that the motor has rotated by a specific rotation amount A game machine F5 comprising: a stopping means for stopping.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the payout means has a motor, and when the motor rotates by a predetermined rotation amount, valuable objects of a predetermined number of units are paid out. Then, whether or not the motor has rotated by a specific amount of rotation is determined by the rotation amount determining means, and the operation of the motor is stopped when it is determined that the motor has rotated by a specific amount of rotation It is stopped for a predetermined period by means.

  Thus, even when a large amount of valuable objects are dispensed, it is possible to suppress the motor from continuing to rotate continuously. Therefore, there is an effect that the motor can be heated by the continuous operation, and the occurrence of the trouble in the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F5, the variable means is configured to vary the payout time by varying the predetermined period, and a gaming machine F6.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F5, the predetermined period is varied and the payout time is varied by the variable means, so that the rotational speed of the motor can be unified. Therefore, there is an effect that control of the motor can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine F5, the variable means is configured to vary the payout time by varying the specific rotation amount. A gaming machine F7.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F5, the variable amount changes the specific amount of rotation and the payout time is variable, so the payout time can be easily controlled by electrical control of the motor. It has the effect of being able to

  A storage unit configured to store, in any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, storage means for storing defined information in association with the set number of times of the plurality of entering permission periods set in the bonus gaming state of 1; A game machine F8, characterized in that the variable means changes the payout time based on the prescribed information.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the payout time is defined in association with the set number of times of the plurality of entering permission period information set in the privilege gaming state of 1. The specified information is stored by the storage means, and the dispensing time is varied by the variable means based on the prescribed information, so the payout time can be changed by a simple process of reading and setting the information stored in the storage means. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load by the variable means can be reduced.

<Feature G group> (Send a signal to stop the supply of balls to island facilities)
A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, a bonus game transition means for shifting the state to a bonus game state advantageous to the player based on a specific lottery result by the lottery means, and entry of a ball being permitted Ball entry permission state and ball entry restricted state in which the ball entry is restricted is set to either of the ball entry state and the state of the ball entry in the bonus game state. The permission setting means for setting the permission state, the payout means for paying out a predetermined number of valuable objects when the ball enters the ball entrance, and the valuable objects to be paid out by the payout means The supply instruction means for instructing the supply of the valuable object to the external supply means that can be supplied from the outside of the machine, the supply instruction means specifying the supply of the valuable object based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition Before stopping only for a period Game machine G1, characterized in that is intended to instruct the external supply means.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means, and the state is shifted to the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player by the bonus game transition means based on the specific lottery result by the lottery means. In the bonus game state, the state of the entrance is set by the permission setting means to the entrance permission state where the ball is permitted to enter. When a ball enters the ball entrance, a predetermined number of valuable objects determined in advance are dispensed by the dispensing means, and the valuable objects dispensed by the dispensing means are supplied to the external supply means which can be supplied from the outside of the gaming machine On the other hand, the supply instructing means instructs supply of a valuable object. Here, the supply instructing unit instructs the external supply unit to stop the supply of the valuable object for a specific period based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition.

  As a result, since it is possible to add tonation how the valuable objects are paid out during the bonus game state, the player can be entertained not only by the amount of valuable objects being paid out, but also by the manner of being paid out. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  The gaming machine G1 includes condition setting means for setting a trigger condition which instructs the external supply means to stop the supply of the valuable object for a specific period by the supply instruction means, and the bonus game The state is configured to have a plurality of ball entry permission periods which are periods set to the ball entry permission state by the ball entry permission means, and the condition setting means is a plurality of items set in one of the bonus game states The trigger condition set in the ball entry permission period set in the second half of the ball entry permission period is more easily established than the trigger condition set in the ball entry permission period set in the first half The gaming machine G2 characterized in that the trigger condition is set to.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the condition setting means sets a trigger condition that triggers the external supply means to stop the supply of valuable objects for a specific period. The bonus game state is configured to have a plurality of entrance permission periods, which are periods set to the entrance permission state by the entrance permission means. Among the plurality of entrance permission periods set in the bonus gaming state of 1, the trigger condition set in the entrance permission period set in the second half is the trigger condition set in the entrance permission period set in the first half The trigger condition is set by the condition setting means so as to be more easily established.

  As a result, since it is possible to lengthen the time required for a valuable object to be awarded in the entry permission period set in the second half, it is possible to continue paying out valuable objects even after the bonus game state is over. it can. Therefore, even after the bonus game state is over, the player can be immersed in the aftermath of the bonus game state while the valuable object is paid out. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine G2, the bonus gaming state is set between a plurality of the ball entry permission periods and the plurality of the ball entry permission periods, and the state of the ball socket is set to the ball entry restriction state Suggestive effect executing means configured to have a time limit for entering a ball and having a restriction suggestion effect that is an effect suggesting that the period is a time limit for entering a ball after the bonus game state is ended. A game machine G3 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the bonus gaming state is set between a plurality of entrance permission periods and the plurality of entrance permission periods, and the entrance restriction period which is a period in which the entrance state is set to the entrance restriction state It is configured to have In addition, after the bonus game state ends, a restriction suggestion effect, which is an effect that suggests that it is a ball entry restriction period, is executed by the suggestion effect execution means.

  This makes it possible for the player to feel as if the bonus game state continues even after the bonus game state has ended. In addition, even after the bonus game state is over, since the provision of valuable objects continues, it is possible to turn the player's consciousness to the valuable objects to be granted. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the period in which the restriction suggestion effect is being executed and the entering restriction period, so that the player feels that the bonus gaming state has continued longer than in reality. Can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine G2 or G3, the condition setting unit is configured to stop the supply of the valuable object for a specific period every fixed cycle in the one ball entry permission period, and in the one or more bonus gaming states. Among the plurality of entry permission periods to be set, the constant period set in the entry permission period to be set in the second half is the constant to be set in the entry permission period to be set in the first half A game machine G4 characterized in that the fixed cycle is set to be shorter than the cycle.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2 or G3, the following effects are exerted. That is, in one entry permission period, the supply of valuable objects is stopped for a specific period at a constant cycle by the condition setting means. Of the plurality of entering permission periods set in the bonus gaming state of 1, the fixed period set in the entering permission period set in the second half is set in the entering permission period set in the first half The constant cycle is set to be shorter than the cycle of.

  As a result, the supply of the valuable object is more likely to be stopped during the entering permission period set in the second half, and therefore, the time required to apply the valuable object can be lengthened. Therefore, it is possible to continue paying out valuable objects even after the end of the bonus gaming state, so it is possible for the player to receive the bonus game while the valuable objects are being paid out even after the end of the bonus gaming state. Can be immersed in the afterglow of the state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  The gaming machine G4 includes storage means for storing definition information in which the predetermined cycle is defined in association with the set number of times of the plurality of entering permission periods set in the bonus gaming state of 1, and the condition A game machine G5 characterized in that the setting means sets the predetermined cycle based on the prescribed information.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G4, the following effects are exerted. That is, prescribed information in which a fixed cycle is defined in association with the set number of times of the plurality of entering permission periods set in one bonus gaming state is stored in the storage means. Then, a constant cycle is set by the condition setting means based on the prescribed information.

  Thereby, the condition setting means can set the fixed cycle by the simple process of selecting the cycle from the prescribed information stored in the storage means. Thus, the processing load of the condition setting means can be reduced.

<Feature H group> (based on the pre-reading result, setting the production which straddles multiple fluctuation)
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery based on the effect executing means for executing the effect, acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the lottery means for the lottery A bonus game transition means for shifting the state to a bonus game state advantageous to the player when a specific lottery result is obtained, and a ball entrance to which a predetermined valuable value is given by the ball entering the ball, Opening / closing setting means for setting patterns of an opening state in which the ball can enter the ball and a closing state in which the ball entering the ball is restricted as the state of the ball entry in the bonus gaming state of 1 and the opening / closing setting means Closed period setting means for setting a closed period in which the state of the ball entrance is in the closed state, and dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information based on a lottery result by the lottery means , Said acquisition hand Using the storage means stored until the lottery condition is established and the information stored in the storage means prior to executing the predetermined lottery before the lottery condition is established A lottery unit, and the effect execution unit, when the specific lottery result is obtained by the advance lottery unit, a plurality of the identification information including dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result A game machine H1 comprising effect variable means capable of changing the content of the closed period suggestion effect over the dynamic display of.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the effect is executed by the effect executing means. The information is acquired by the acquiring means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the predetermined lottery is executed by the lottery means and the information becomes a specific lottery result by the lottery means, the game is performed by the bonus game transition means The state is shifted to a benefit game state advantageous to the player. Then, a predetermined valuable value is given by the ball entering the ball entrance, and as the state of the ball entrance, the open state where the ball can enter and the closed state where the ball entry is restricted Is set by the opening / closing setting means in the privilege gaming state of 1, and the closing period setting means is set by the closing period setting means as a period during which the state of the ball entrance is closed by the opening / closing setting means. Dynamic display of identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means based on the lottery result by the lottery means. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means until the lottery conditions are satisfied, and the lottery conditions are executed in advance by the prior lottery means before the lottery conditions are satisfied using the information stored in the storage means Ru. Here, when a specific lottery result is obtained by the pre-lottery means, the contents of the closed period suggestion effect are displayed over the dynamic display of a plurality of identification information including the dynamic display of identification information indicating the specific lottery result. It is variable by the effect variable means. Thereby, if the effect is variable by the effect variable means, it is possible to make the player expect a bonus game state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the gaming machine H1, the effect executing means executes a closed period suggestive effect which is an effect suggesting that the closed period is in a predetermined period after the end of the bonus game state, and the effect A game machine H2, characterized in that the variable means changes the content of the closed period suggestion effect during execution of the closed period suggestion effect.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are exerted. That is, in a predetermined period after the bonus game state is ended, the suggestion execution means is triggered by the suggestion effect indicating that it is a closed period. While the closing period suggestion effect is being executed, the contents of the hint period suggestion effect are varied by the effect variation means. Thereby, it is possible to make the plurality of bonus game states appear as if they are one bonus game state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further improve the player's interest.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, a period discriminating means for discriminating a period until the bonus gaming state is started based on the specific lottery result when the specific lottery result is obtained by the advance lottery means. The effect variable means may change the content of the closed period suggestion effect when it is determined that the bonus game state is started after the predetermined period is exceeded by the period determination means. The game machine H3 which features.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the following effects are exerted. That is, when a specific lottery result is obtained by the advance lottery means, a period until the bonus game state is started is determined by the period discriminating means based on the specific lottery result. Further, when it is determined that the bonus game state is started after the predetermined period has been exceeded by the period determination means, the content of the closed period suggestion effect is changed by the effect variable means. As a result, when the length of the closing period suggestion effect becomes long, it can be recognized that the expectation of the bonus game state is high, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine H3, based on the period until the bonus game state determined by the period determining means is started, the variable time specifying to specify the time to change the content of the closed period suggestion effect by the effect variable means A game machine H4 characterized by comprising means.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H3, the content of the closing period suggestion effect is varied by the effect varying means based on the period determined by the period determining means and the multiple bonus gaming state is started. Since the time is specified by the variable time specifying means, regardless of the number of times and the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information to be performed, the execution period of the effect after being changed by the effect variable means can be made constant. It has the effect of

  Each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed on a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the winning opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

Each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to the winning state when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are some gaming machines that can store lottery numbers for a predetermined number of times based on winning on the starting winning opening until each lottery condition is established (for example, patent document 1: Patent No. 2005-118072) Issue).
However, in such a gaming machine, the game ball may not win a prize to the start winning opening by the end of the hit state, and there is a possibility that the lottery will not be executed for a long time after the end of the hit state.
The present technical idea is made to solve the problems exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which can make it easy to perform a lottery after the end of the hit state.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a ball entry port capable of entering a ball, a game state, and a ball enters the ball entry port from the first state and the first state. It is acquired by the game state setting means set to either of the 2nd state which is an easy game state, the acquisition means which acquires information based on a ball entering the ball entrance and the information acquisition means A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition using the information, and a bonus game in which the state is shifted to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player based on the particular lottery result by the lottery means And a storage unit capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition unit until the lottery by the lottery unit is performed, and the gaming state setting unit is in the second state during the bonus game state. Setting.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 in which the value giving entrance to which a predetermined valuable value is given when the ball enters the ball and the state of the value giving entrance. The state of the value-added entrance by the open / close setting means for setting the open state in which the ball can enter and the closed state in which the ball is restricted in the bonus gaming state of 1, and the open / close setting means Closing period setting means for setting a closing period which is a period in which the closing state is the closing state, and a closing period suggestive effect which is an effect suggesting that the closing period is a predetermined period after the bonus game state is ended. The predetermined period is a period during which the lottery by the lottery means can be performed a plurality of times.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, wherein the storage means is provided with a predetermined upper limit for the number of pieces of information that can be stored, and the predetermined period Is a period in which the lottery means can execute at least a lottery having a number equal to or more than the predetermined upper limit value.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects can be obtained. That is, the gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means to either the first state or the second state in which the ball is more likely to enter the ball entrance than the first state. In addition, information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the ball entering the ball entrance. When the lottery condition is established, a predetermined lottery using the acquired information is performed by the lottery means, and based on the particular lottery result by the lottery means, an advantage advantageous to the player by the bonus game transition means The state is shifted to the gaming state. Then, the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means until the lottery by the lottery means is performed. Then, during the bonus game state, the second state is set by the game state setting means.
Thereby, in the bonus game state, the game is set to a game state in which the ball is easy to enter the ball entrance, so that the information can be easily acquired by the acquisition unit during the bonus game state. Therefore, more information is stored by the storage means before the end of the bonus game state, so that it is possible to easily perform a predetermined lottery after the end of the bonus game state.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, a predetermined valuable value is imparted by entering the ball into the value-granting entrance, and as the state of the value-entering entrance, the open state in which the ball can enter and the ball entering are restricted. The closed state is set by the open / close setting means in the first bonus game state, and the closed period setting means sets the closed period which is the period in which the state of the value-added entrance is closed. In the predetermined period after the bonus game state is ended, a closing period suggestion effect which is an effect suggesting that it is a closing period is set by the effect executing means. In addition, the lottery by the lottery means is executed a plurality of times in a predetermined period.
Thus, the player can feel as if the bonus game state is continuing while the closing period suggestion effect is being executed, so that the bonus game state is felt to last for a long time. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, a predetermined upper limit is provided for the number of pieces of information that can be stored in the storage unit. In the period, since it is possible to execute the drawing of the number of times equal to or more than the predetermined upper limit by the drawing means, it becomes a specific drawing result during execution of the closed period suggestion effect, and it is possible to easily shift to the bonus game state. As a result, the bonus gaming state and the closing period suggestion effect can be easily repeated, so that the player can be made to feel that the bonus gaming state continues for a long time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64 first ball entrance (second ball entry means)
65a specific winning combination (ball entrance)
112 launch control device (launch means)
203a1 Special symbol 1 Hold ball storage area (part of storage means)
203a2 Special symbol 2 Hold ball storage area (part of storage means)
640 second ball entrance (first ball entry means)
S123 state setting means S212 discrimination means S213 benefits game execution means S305 dynamic display execution means S403, S405 portion of some S503, S505 execution period setting means executes the period setting means
S625, S631 acquisition means S1203, S1206 open / close setting means S1617 suggestion effect execution means

Claims (2)

First ball entering means provided at a position where the game ball fired in the first direction can enter the ball;
A second ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball fired in a second direction where the game ball can not easily enter the ball into the first ball entry means can enter the ball;
The first state in which the game ball fired in the first direction is less likely to enter the first ball entry means, and the game ball fired in the first direction than the first state is the first ball enter State setting means capable of setting a second state where it is easy to enter the means;
Obtaining means for obtaining predetermined discrimination information based on the game ball having entered at least one of the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means;
A determination unit that performs a predetermined determination using the determination information acquired by the acquisition unit;
Bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result;
The discrimination information obtained by the acquisition means based on the game ball entering at least the first ball entry means is determined using the discrimination information with the predetermined number as the upper limit. Storage means that can be stored until
The bonus game is at least configured to set a specific period that is likely to be advantageous to the player by firing the gaming ball in the first direction,
The state setting means sets the first state based on establishment of at least a specific condition different from the end of the bonus game, when the second state is set at least while the bonus game is being executed. And are configured in
When the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction in the specific period, the number of game balls of the specified number or more is easy to enter the first ball entry means during execution of the bonus game all SANYO that is configured to be,
In state after the award game is finished, it is configured to execute the suggested specific effect which can be a game same game as suggested by representation embodiment to be executed during at least the benefits game Rukoto A game machine characterized by   The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising: a launcher capable of launching a game ball.

Images